1 |
280 |
jeremybenn |
/* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
|
2 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998
|
3 |
|
|
1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
|
4 |
|
|
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
5 |
|
|
|
6 |
|
|
This file is part of GCC.
|
7 |
|
|
|
8 |
|
|
GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
|
9 |
|
|
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
|
10 |
|
|
Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
|
11 |
|
|
version.
|
12 |
|
|
|
13 |
|
|
GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
|
14 |
|
|
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
|
15 |
|
|
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
|
16 |
|
|
for more details.
|
17 |
|
|
|
18 |
|
|
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
19 |
|
|
along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
|
20 |
|
|
<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
|
21 |
|
|
|
22 |
|
|
#include "config.h"
|
23 |
|
|
/* stdio.h must precede rtl.h for FFS. */
|
24 |
|
|
#include "system.h"
|
25 |
|
|
#include "coretypes.h"
|
26 |
|
|
#include "tm.h"
|
27 |
|
|
#include "rtl.h"
|
28 |
|
|
#include "tm_p.h"
|
29 |
|
|
#include "hard-reg-set.h"
|
30 |
|
|
#include "regs.h"
|
31 |
|
|
#include "basic-block.h"
|
32 |
|
|
#include "flags.h"
|
33 |
|
|
#include "real.h"
|
34 |
|
|
#include "insn-config.h"
|
35 |
|
|
#include "recog.h"
|
36 |
|
|
#include "function.h"
|
37 |
|
|
#include "expr.h"
|
38 |
|
|
#include "toplev.h"
|
39 |
|
|
#include "output.h"
|
40 |
|
|
#include "ggc.h"
|
41 |
|
|
#include "timevar.h"
|
42 |
|
|
#include "except.h"
|
43 |
|
|
#include "target.h"
|
44 |
|
|
#include "params.h"
|
45 |
|
|
#include "rtlhooks-def.h"
|
46 |
|
|
#include "tree-pass.h"
|
47 |
|
|
#include "df.h"
|
48 |
|
|
#include "dbgcnt.h"
|
49 |
|
|
|
50 |
|
|
/* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
|
51 |
|
|
through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
|
52 |
|
|
have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
|
53 |
|
|
expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
|
54 |
|
|
|
55 |
|
|
It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
|
56 |
|
|
when control paths merge in this code; so, at each label, we forget all
|
57 |
|
|
that is known and start fresh. This can be described as processing each
|
58 |
|
|
extended basic block separately. We have a separate pass to perform
|
59 |
|
|
global CSE.
|
60 |
|
|
|
61 |
|
|
Note CSE can turn a conditional or computed jump into a nop or
|
62 |
|
|
an unconditional jump. When this occurs we arrange to run the jump
|
63 |
|
|
optimizer after CSE to delete the unreachable code.
|
64 |
|
|
|
65 |
|
|
We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
|
66 |
|
|
a hash table for most expressions, and a vector of "quantity
|
67 |
|
|
numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
|
68 |
|
|
|
69 |
|
|
The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
|
70 |
|
|
because it is faster. It is possible because registers references
|
71 |
|
|
contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
|
72 |
|
|
a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
|
73 |
|
|
identical if they have the same number. General expressions
|
74 |
|
|
do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
|
75 |
|
|
information recorded on an expression other than a register
|
76 |
|
|
is to keep it in a hash table.
|
77 |
|
|
|
78 |
|
|
Registers and "quantity numbers":
|
79 |
|
|
|
80 |
|
|
At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
|
81 |
|
|
registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
|
82 |
|
|
numbers to indicate their contents. During scan, when the code
|
83 |
|
|
copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
|
84 |
|
|
When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
|
85 |
|
|
quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
|
86 |
|
|
`REG_QTY (N)' records what quantity register N is currently thought
|
87 |
|
|
of as containing.
|
88 |
|
|
|
89 |
|
|
All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to zero.
|
90 |
|
|
If register N has not been assigned a quantity, `REG_QTY (N)' will
|
91 |
|
|
equal -N - 1, which is always negative.
|
92 |
|
|
|
93 |
|
|
Quantity numbers below zero do not exist and none of the `qty_table'
|
94 |
|
|
entries should be referenced with a negative index.
|
95 |
|
|
|
96 |
|
|
We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
|
97 |
|
|
quantity number. The `qty_table` members `first_reg' and `last_reg',
|
98 |
|
|
and `reg_eqv_table' members `next' and `prev' hold these chains.
|
99 |
|
|
|
100 |
|
|
The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
|
101 |
|
|
Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
|
102 |
|
|
We replace any equivalent register with that one.
|
103 |
|
|
|
104 |
|
|
If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
|
105 |
|
|
REG expressions with qty_table `mode' must be in the hash table for both
|
106 |
|
|
registers and must be in the same class.
|
107 |
|
|
|
108 |
|
|
The converse is not true. Since hard registers may be referenced in
|
109 |
|
|
any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
|
110 |
|
|
but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
|
111 |
|
|
of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
|
112 |
|
|
|
113 |
|
|
Constants and quantity numbers
|
114 |
|
|
|
115 |
|
|
When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
|
116 |
|
|
in the appropriate qty_table `const_rtx'. This is in addition to
|
117 |
|
|
putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
|
118 |
|
|
|
119 |
|
|
Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
|
120 |
|
|
macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value. In any
|
121 |
|
|
event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
|
122 |
|
|
|
123 |
|
|
When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
|
124 |
|
|
of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate qty_table
|
125 |
|
|
`const_rtx'.
|
126 |
|
|
|
127 |
|
|
Integer constants don't have a machine mode. However, cse
|
128 |
|
|
determines the intended machine mode from the destination
|
129 |
|
|
of the instruction that moves the constant. The machine mode
|
130 |
|
|
is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
|
131 |
|
|
constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
|
132 |
|
|
|
133 |
|
|
Other expressions:
|
134 |
|
|
|
135 |
|
|
To record known equivalences among expressions in general
|
136 |
|
|
we use a hash table called `table'. It has a fixed number of buckets
|
137 |
|
|
that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
|
138 |
|
|
These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
|
139 |
|
|
hash codes.
|
140 |
|
|
|
141 |
|
|
Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
|
142 |
|
|
currently have equivalent values.
|
143 |
|
|
|
144 |
|
|
Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
|
145 |
|
|
the expression. This is done using `reg_qty' and qty_table `first_reg'.
|
146 |
|
|
The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
|
147 |
|
|
number, not the register number.
|
148 |
|
|
|
149 |
|
|
When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
|
150 |
|
|
hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
|
151 |
|
|
could be different as a result.
|
152 |
|
|
|
153 |
|
|
1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
|
154 |
|
|
ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed. That is because
|
155 |
|
|
nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
|
156 |
|
|
The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
|
157 |
|
|
|
158 |
|
|
The special cases are when the address is constant or is
|
159 |
|
|
a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
|
160 |
|
|
or a static chain pointer. When such addresses are stored in,
|
161 |
|
|
we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
|
162 |
|
|
due to overlap. `invalidate' does this.
|
163 |
|
|
All expressions that refer to non-constant
|
164 |
|
|
memory addresses are also invalidated. `invalidate_memory' does this.
|
165 |
|
|
|
166 |
|
|
2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
|
167 |
|
|
containing references to that register, and only those,
|
168 |
|
|
must be removed.
|
169 |
|
|
|
170 |
|
|
Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
|
171 |
|
|
a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
|
172 |
|
|
Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
|
173 |
|
|
entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
|
174 |
|
|
changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
|
175 |
|
|
the register's new value. This sequence of circumstances is rare
|
176 |
|
|
within any one basic block.
|
177 |
|
|
|
178 |
|
|
`REG_TICK' and `REG_IN_TABLE', accessors for members of
|
179 |
|
|
cse_reg_info, are used to detect this case. REG_TICK (i) is
|
180 |
|
|
incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
|
181 |
|
|
REG_IN_TABLE (i) holds -1 if no references to register i have been
|
182 |
|
|
entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value REG_TICK (i)
|
183 |
|
|
had when the references were entered. If we want to enter a
|
184 |
|
|
reference and REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i), we must scan and
|
185 |
|
|
remove old references. Until we want to enter a new entry, the
|
186 |
|
|
mere fact that the two vectors don't match makes the entries be
|
187 |
|
|
ignored if anyone tries to match them.
|
188 |
|
|
|
189 |
|
|
Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
|
190 |
|
|
the equivalent-register chains. However, `REG_TICK' and
|
191 |
|
|
`REG_IN_TABLE' do not apply to expressions which are simple
|
192 |
|
|
register references. These expressions are removed from the table
|
193 |
|
|
immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
|
194 |
|
|
we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
|
195 |
|
|
the register.
|
196 |
|
|
|
197 |
|
|
A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
|
198 |
|
|
reuse. A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
|
199 |
|
|
invalidates everything that resides in memory.
|
200 |
|
|
|
201 |
|
|
Related expressions:
|
202 |
|
|
|
203 |
|
|
Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
|
204 |
|
|
are called related. When a constant expression is put in
|
205 |
|
|
the table, the related expression with no constant term
|
206 |
|
|
is also entered. These are made to point at each other
|
207 |
|
|
so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
|
208 |
|
|
register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression. */
|
209 |
|
|
|
210 |
|
|
/* Length of qty_table vector. We know in advance we will not need
|
211 |
|
|
a quantity number this big. */
|
212 |
|
|
|
213 |
|
|
static int max_qty;
|
214 |
|
|
|
215 |
|
|
/* Next quantity number to be allocated.
|
216 |
|
|
This is 1 + the largest number needed so far. */
|
217 |
|
|
|
218 |
|
|
static int next_qty;
|
219 |
|
|
|
220 |
|
|
/* Per-qty information tracking.
|
221 |
|
|
|
222 |
|
|
`first_reg' and `last_reg' track the head and tail of the
|
223 |
|
|
chain of registers which currently contain this quantity.
|
224 |
|
|
|
225 |
|
|
`mode' contains the machine mode of this quantity.
|
226 |
|
|
|
227 |
|
|
`const_rtx' holds the rtx of the constant value of this
|
228 |
|
|
quantity, if known. A summations of the frame/arg pointer
|
229 |
|
|
and a constant can also be entered here. When this holds
|
230 |
|
|
a known value, `const_insn' is the insn which stored the
|
231 |
|
|
constant value.
|
232 |
|
|
|
233 |
|
|
`comparison_{code,const,qty}' are used to track when a
|
234 |
|
|
comparison between a quantity and some constant or register has
|
235 |
|
|
been passed. In such a case, we know the results of the comparison
|
236 |
|
|
in case we see it again. These members record a comparison that
|
237 |
|
|
is known to be true. `comparison_code' holds the rtx code of such
|
238 |
|
|
a comparison, else it is set to UNKNOWN and the other two
|
239 |
|
|
comparison members are undefined. `comparison_const' holds
|
240 |
|
|
the constant being compared against, or zero if the comparison
|
241 |
|
|
is not against a constant. `comparison_qty' holds the quantity
|
242 |
|
|
being compared against when the result is known. If the comparison
|
243 |
|
|
is not with a register, `comparison_qty' is -1. */
|
244 |
|
|
|
245 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem
|
246 |
|
|
{
|
247 |
|
|
rtx const_rtx;
|
248 |
|
|
rtx const_insn;
|
249 |
|
|
rtx comparison_const;
|
250 |
|
|
int comparison_qty;
|
251 |
|
|
unsigned int first_reg, last_reg;
|
252 |
|
|
/* The sizes of these fields should match the sizes of the
|
253 |
|
|
code and mode fields of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h). */
|
254 |
|
|
ENUM_BITFIELD(rtx_code) comparison_code : 16;
|
255 |
|
|
ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
|
256 |
|
|
};
|
257 |
|
|
|
258 |
|
|
/* The table of all qtys, indexed by qty number. */
|
259 |
|
|
static struct qty_table_elem *qty_table;
|
260 |
|
|
|
261 |
|
|
/* Structure used to pass arguments via for_each_rtx to function
|
262 |
|
|
cse_change_cc_mode. */
|
263 |
|
|
struct change_cc_mode_args
|
264 |
|
|
{
|
265 |
|
|
rtx insn;
|
266 |
|
|
rtx newreg;
|
267 |
|
|
};
|
268 |
|
|
|
269 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
270 |
|
|
/* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
|
271 |
|
|
table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
|
272 |
|
|
its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
|
273 |
|
|
|
274 |
|
|
Instead, we store below the current and last value assigned to CC0.
|
275 |
|
|
If it should happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference
|
276 |
|
|
to the actual assigned value. In case it is a constant, we store
|
277 |
|
|
the mode in which the constant should be interpreted. */
|
278 |
|
|
|
279 |
|
|
static rtx this_insn_cc0, prev_insn_cc0;
|
280 |
|
|
static enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode, prev_insn_cc0_mode;
|
281 |
|
|
#endif
|
282 |
|
|
|
283 |
|
|
/* Insn being scanned. */
|
284 |
|
|
|
285 |
|
|
static rtx this_insn;
|
286 |
|
|
static bool optimize_this_for_speed_p;
|
287 |
|
|
|
288 |
|
|
/* Index by register number, gives the number of the next (or
|
289 |
|
|
previous) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
|
290 |
|
|
value.
|
291 |
|
|
|
292 |
|
|
Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
|
293 |
|
|
|
294 |
|
|
If REG_QTY (N) == -N - 1, reg_eqv_table[N].next is undefined. */
|
295 |
|
|
|
296 |
|
|
/* Per-register equivalence chain. */
|
297 |
|
|
struct reg_eqv_elem
|
298 |
|
|
{
|
299 |
|
|
int next, prev;
|
300 |
|
|
};
|
301 |
|
|
|
302 |
|
|
/* The table of all register equivalence chains. */
|
303 |
|
|
static struct reg_eqv_elem *reg_eqv_table;
|
304 |
|
|
|
305 |
|
|
struct cse_reg_info
|
306 |
|
|
{
|
307 |
|
|
/* The timestamp at which this register is initialized. */
|
308 |
|
|
unsigned int timestamp;
|
309 |
|
|
|
310 |
|
|
/* The quantity number of the register's current contents. */
|
311 |
|
|
int reg_qty;
|
312 |
|
|
|
313 |
|
|
/* The number of times the register has been altered in the current
|
314 |
|
|
basic block. */
|
315 |
|
|
int reg_tick;
|
316 |
|
|
|
317 |
|
|
/* The REG_TICK value at which rtx's containing this register are
|
318 |
|
|
valid in the hash table. If this does not equal the current
|
319 |
|
|
reg_tick value, such expressions existing in the hash table are
|
320 |
|
|
invalid. */
|
321 |
|
|
int reg_in_table;
|
322 |
|
|
|
323 |
|
|
/* The SUBREG that was set when REG_TICK was last incremented. Set
|
324 |
|
|
to -1 if the last store was to the whole register, not a subreg. */
|
325 |
|
|
unsigned int subreg_ticked;
|
326 |
|
|
};
|
327 |
|
|
|
328 |
|
|
/* A table of cse_reg_info indexed by register numbers. */
|
329 |
|
|
static struct cse_reg_info *cse_reg_info_table;
|
330 |
|
|
|
331 |
|
|
/* The size of the above table. */
|
332 |
|
|
static unsigned int cse_reg_info_table_size;
|
333 |
|
|
|
334 |
|
|
/* The index of the first entry that has not been initialized. */
|
335 |
|
|
static unsigned int cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized;
|
336 |
|
|
|
337 |
|
|
/* The timestamp at the beginning of the current run of
|
338 |
|
|
cse_extended_basic_block. We increment this variable at the beginning of
|
339 |
|
|
the current run of cse_extended_basic_block. The timestamp field of a
|
340 |
|
|
cse_reg_info entry matches the value of this variable if and only
|
341 |
|
|
if the entry has been initialized during the current run of
|
342 |
|
|
cse_extended_basic_block. */
|
343 |
|
|
static unsigned int cse_reg_info_timestamp;
|
344 |
|
|
|
345 |
|
|
/* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
|
346 |
|
|
currently a REG expression in the hash table. Note the difference
|
347 |
|
|
from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
|
348 |
|
|
expression in the table. */
|
349 |
|
|
|
350 |
|
|
static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
|
351 |
|
|
|
352 |
|
|
/* True if CSE has altered the CFG. */
|
353 |
|
|
static bool cse_cfg_altered;
|
354 |
|
|
|
355 |
|
|
/* True if CSE has altered conditional jump insns in such a way
|
356 |
|
|
that jump optimization should be redone. */
|
357 |
|
|
static bool cse_jumps_altered;
|
358 |
|
|
|
359 |
|
|
/* True if we put a LABEL_REF into the hash table for an INSN
|
360 |
|
|
without a REG_LABEL_OPERAND, we have to rerun jump after CSE
|
361 |
|
|
to put in the note. */
|
362 |
|
|
static bool recorded_label_ref;
|
363 |
|
|
|
364 |
|
|
/* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
|
365 |
|
|
if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
|
366 |
|
|
subexpression. */
|
367 |
|
|
|
368 |
|
|
static int do_not_record;
|
369 |
|
|
|
370 |
|
|
/* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
|
371 |
|
|
if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed. */
|
372 |
|
|
|
373 |
|
|
static int hash_arg_in_memory;
|
374 |
|
|
|
375 |
|
|
/* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
|
376 |
|
|
each recording one expression's information.
|
377 |
|
|
That expression is in the `exp' field.
|
378 |
|
|
|
379 |
|
|
The canon_exp field contains a canonical (from the point of view of
|
380 |
|
|
alias analysis) version of the `exp' field.
|
381 |
|
|
|
382 |
|
|
Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
|
383 |
|
|
through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
|
384 |
|
|
|
385 |
|
|
Each set of expressions with equivalent values
|
386 |
|
|
are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
|
387 |
|
|
and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
|
388 |
|
|
the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
|
389 |
|
|
that chain. The chain is in order of increasing cost.
|
390 |
|
|
Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
|
391 |
|
|
|
392 |
|
|
The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
|
393 |
|
|
involve any reference to memory. These elements are removed
|
394 |
|
|
whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
|
395 |
|
|
To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
|
396 |
|
|
the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
|
397 |
|
|
the frame pointer or argument pointer.
|
398 |
|
|
|
399 |
|
|
The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
|
400 |
|
|
(that differ by adding an integer).
|
401 |
|
|
The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
|
402 |
|
|
`related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
|
403 |
|
|
chain is not useful.
|
404 |
|
|
|
405 |
|
|
The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
|
406 |
|
|
The `regcost' field stores the value returned by approx_reg_cost for
|
407 |
|
|
this element's expression.
|
408 |
|
|
|
409 |
|
|
The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
|
410 |
|
|
a fixed address).
|
411 |
|
|
|
412 |
|
|
The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
|
413 |
|
|
|
414 |
|
|
The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
|
415 |
|
|
if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
|
416 |
|
|
field is the mode it was being used as. Each constant is
|
417 |
|
|
recorded separately for each mode it is used with. */
|
418 |
|
|
|
419 |
|
|
struct table_elt
|
420 |
|
|
{
|
421 |
|
|
rtx exp;
|
422 |
|
|
rtx canon_exp;
|
423 |
|
|
struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
|
424 |
|
|
struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
|
425 |
|
|
struct table_elt *next_same_value;
|
426 |
|
|
struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
|
427 |
|
|
struct table_elt *first_same_value;
|
428 |
|
|
struct table_elt *related_value;
|
429 |
|
|
int cost;
|
430 |
|
|
int regcost;
|
431 |
|
|
/* The size of this field should match the size
|
432 |
|
|
of the mode field of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h). */
|
433 |
|
|
ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
|
434 |
|
|
char in_memory;
|
435 |
|
|
char is_const;
|
436 |
|
|
char flag;
|
437 |
|
|
};
|
438 |
|
|
|
439 |
|
|
/* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
|
440 |
|
|
things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
|
441 |
|
|
down a lot of loops that happen frequently. */
|
442 |
|
|
#define HASH_SHIFT 5
|
443 |
|
|
#define HASH_SIZE (1 << HASH_SHIFT)
|
444 |
|
|
#define HASH_MASK (HASH_SIZE - 1)
|
445 |
|
|
|
446 |
|
|
/* Compute hash code of X in mode M. Special-case case where X is a pseudo
|
447 |
|
|
register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set). */
|
448 |
|
|
|
449 |
|
|
#define HASH(X, M) \
|
450 |
|
|
((REG_P (X) && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
|
451 |
|
|
? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) REG_QTY (REGNO (X))) \
|
452 |
|
|
: canon_hash (X, M)) & HASH_MASK)
|
453 |
|
|
|
454 |
|
|
/* Like HASH, but without side-effects. */
|
455 |
|
|
#define SAFE_HASH(X, M) \
|
456 |
|
|
((REG_P (X) && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
|
457 |
|
|
? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) REG_QTY (REGNO (X))) \
|
458 |
|
|
: safe_hash (X, M)) & HASH_MASK)
|
459 |
|
|
|
460 |
|
|
/* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for the
|
461 |
|
|
purpose of approximating register costs.
|
462 |
|
|
It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
|
463 |
|
|
non-fixed hard regs.
|
464 |
|
|
A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed. */
|
465 |
|
|
#define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
|
466 |
|
|
((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
|
467 |
|
|
|| fixed_regs[N] || global_regs[N])
|
468 |
|
|
|
469 |
|
|
/* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt. Fixed
|
470 |
|
|
hard registers and pointers into the frame are the cheapest with a cost
|
471 |
|
|
of 0. Next come pseudos with a cost of one and other hard registers with
|
472 |
|
|
a cost of 2. Aside from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'. */
|
473 |
|
|
|
474 |
|
|
#define CHEAP_REGNO(N) \
|
475 |
|
|
(REGNO_PTR_FRAME_P(N) \
|
476 |
|
|
|| (HARD_REGISTER_NUM_P (N) \
|
477 |
|
|
&& FIXED_REGNO_P (N) && REGNO_REG_CLASS (N) != NO_REGS))
|
478 |
|
|
|
479 |
|
|
#define COST(X) (REG_P (X) ? 0 : notreg_cost (X, SET))
|
480 |
|
|
#define COST_IN(X,OUTER) (REG_P (X) ? 0 : notreg_cost (X, OUTER))
|
481 |
|
|
|
482 |
|
|
/* Get the number of times this register has been updated in this
|
483 |
|
|
basic block. */
|
484 |
|
|
|
485 |
|
|
#define REG_TICK(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_tick)
|
486 |
|
|
|
487 |
|
|
/* Get the point at which REG was recorded in the table. */
|
488 |
|
|
|
489 |
|
|
#define REG_IN_TABLE(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_in_table)
|
490 |
|
|
|
491 |
|
|
/* Get the SUBREG set at the last increment to REG_TICK (-1 if not a
|
492 |
|
|
SUBREG). */
|
493 |
|
|
|
494 |
|
|
#define SUBREG_TICKED(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->subreg_ticked)
|
495 |
|
|
|
496 |
|
|
/* Get the quantity number for REG. */
|
497 |
|
|
|
498 |
|
|
#define REG_QTY(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_qty)
|
499 |
|
|
|
500 |
|
|
/* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
|
501 |
|
|
into the qty_table. */
|
502 |
|
|
|
503 |
|
|
#define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (REG_QTY (N) >= 0)
|
504 |
|
|
|
505 |
|
|
/* Compare table_elt X and Y and return true iff X is cheaper than Y. */
|
506 |
|
|
|
507 |
|
|
#define CHEAPER(X, Y) \
|
508 |
|
|
(preferable ((X)->cost, (X)->regcost, (Y)->cost, (Y)->regcost) < 0)
|
509 |
|
|
|
510 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *table[HASH_SIZE];
|
511 |
|
|
|
512 |
|
|
/* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
|
513 |
|
|
but currently removed from the table. */
|
514 |
|
|
|
515 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
|
516 |
|
|
|
517 |
|
|
/* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
|
518 |
|
|
symbolic constant. If this was found, it means we should try to
|
519 |
|
|
convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
|
520 |
|
|
the insn. */
|
521 |
|
|
|
522 |
|
|
static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
|
523 |
|
|
static int constant_pool_entries_regcost;
|
524 |
|
|
|
525 |
|
|
/* Trace a patch through the CFG. */
|
526 |
|
|
|
527 |
|
|
struct branch_path
|
528 |
|
|
{
|
529 |
|
|
/* The basic block for this path entry. */
|
530 |
|
|
basic_block bb;
|
531 |
|
|
};
|
532 |
|
|
|
533 |
|
|
/* This data describes a block that will be processed by
|
534 |
|
|
cse_extended_basic_block. */
|
535 |
|
|
|
536 |
|
|
struct cse_basic_block_data
|
537 |
|
|
{
|
538 |
|
|
/* Total number of SETs in block. */
|
539 |
|
|
int nsets;
|
540 |
|
|
/* Size of current branch path, if any. */
|
541 |
|
|
int path_size;
|
542 |
|
|
/* Current path, indicating which basic_blocks will be processed. */
|
543 |
|
|
struct branch_path *path;
|
544 |
|
|
};
|
545 |
|
|
|
546 |
|
|
|
547 |
|
|
/* Pointers to the live in/live out bitmaps for the boundaries of the
|
548 |
|
|
current EBB. */
|
549 |
|
|
static bitmap cse_ebb_live_in, cse_ebb_live_out;
|
550 |
|
|
|
551 |
|
|
/* A simple bitmap to track which basic blocks have been visited
|
552 |
|
|
already as part of an already processed extended basic block. */
|
553 |
|
|
static sbitmap cse_visited_basic_blocks;
|
554 |
|
|
|
555 |
|
|
static bool fixed_base_plus_p (rtx x);
|
556 |
|
|
static int notreg_cost (rtx, enum rtx_code);
|
557 |
|
|
static int approx_reg_cost_1 (rtx *, void *);
|
558 |
|
|
static int approx_reg_cost (rtx);
|
559 |
|
|
static int preferable (int, int, int, int);
|
560 |
|
|
static void new_basic_block (void);
|
561 |
|
|
static void make_new_qty (unsigned int, enum machine_mode);
|
562 |
|
|
static void make_regs_eqv (unsigned int, unsigned int);
|
563 |
|
|
static void delete_reg_equiv (unsigned int);
|
564 |
|
|
static int mention_regs (rtx);
|
565 |
|
|
static int insert_regs (rtx, struct table_elt *, int);
|
566 |
|
|
static void remove_from_table (struct table_elt *, unsigned);
|
567 |
|
|
static void remove_pseudo_from_table (rtx, unsigned);
|
568 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *lookup (rtx, unsigned, enum machine_mode);
|
569 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *lookup_for_remove (rtx, unsigned, enum machine_mode);
|
570 |
|
|
static rtx lookup_as_function (rtx, enum rtx_code);
|
571 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *insert_with_costs (rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
|
572 |
|
|
enum machine_mode, int, int);
|
573 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *insert (rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
|
574 |
|
|
enum machine_mode);
|
575 |
|
|
static void merge_equiv_classes (struct table_elt *, struct table_elt *);
|
576 |
|
|
static void invalidate (rtx, enum machine_mode);
|
577 |
|
|
static bool cse_rtx_varies_p (const_rtx, bool);
|
578 |
|
|
static void remove_invalid_refs (unsigned int);
|
579 |
|
|
static void remove_invalid_subreg_refs (unsigned int, unsigned int,
|
580 |
|
|
enum machine_mode);
|
581 |
|
|
static void rehash_using_reg (rtx);
|
582 |
|
|
static void invalidate_memory (void);
|
583 |
|
|
static void invalidate_for_call (void);
|
584 |
|
|
static rtx use_related_value (rtx, struct table_elt *);
|
585 |
|
|
|
586 |
|
|
static inline unsigned canon_hash (rtx, enum machine_mode);
|
587 |
|
|
static inline unsigned safe_hash (rtx, enum machine_mode);
|
588 |
|
|
static inline unsigned hash_rtx_string (const char *);
|
589 |
|
|
|
590 |
|
|
static rtx canon_reg (rtx, rtx);
|
591 |
|
|
static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args (enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *,
|
592 |
|
|
enum machine_mode *,
|
593 |
|
|
enum machine_mode *);
|
594 |
|
|
static rtx fold_rtx (rtx, rtx);
|
595 |
|
|
static rtx equiv_constant (rtx);
|
596 |
|
|
static void record_jump_equiv (rtx, bool);
|
597 |
|
|
static void record_jump_cond (enum rtx_code, enum machine_mode, rtx, rtx,
|
598 |
|
|
int);
|
599 |
|
|
static void cse_insn (rtx);
|
600 |
|
|
static void cse_prescan_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *);
|
601 |
|
|
static void invalidate_from_clobbers (rtx);
|
602 |
|
|
static rtx cse_process_notes (rtx, rtx, bool *);
|
603 |
|
|
static void cse_extended_basic_block (struct cse_basic_block_data *);
|
604 |
|
|
static void count_reg_usage (rtx, int *, rtx, int);
|
605 |
|
|
static int check_for_label_ref (rtx *, void *);
|
606 |
|
|
extern void dump_class (struct table_elt*);
|
607 |
|
|
static void get_cse_reg_info_1 (unsigned int regno);
|
608 |
|
|
static struct cse_reg_info * get_cse_reg_info (unsigned int regno);
|
609 |
|
|
static int check_dependence (rtx *, void *);
|
610 |
|
|
|
611 |
|
|
static void flush_hash_table (void);
|
612 |
|
|
static bool insn_live_p (rtx, int *);
|
613 |
|
|
static bool set_live_p (rtx, rtx, int *);
|
614 |
|
|
static int cse_change_cc_mode (rtx *, void *);
|
615 |
|
|
static void cse_change_cc_mode_insn (rtx, rtx);
|
616 |
|
|
static void cse_change_cc_mode_insns (rtx, rtx, rtx);
|
617 |
|
|
static enum machine_mode cse_cc_succs (basic_block, basic_block, rtx, rtx,
|
618 |
|
|
bool);
|
619 |
|
|
|
620 |
|
|
|
621 |
|
|
#undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART
|
622 |
|
|
#define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART gen_lowpart_if_possible
|
623 |
|
|
|
624 |
|
|
static const struct rtl_hooks cse_rtl_hooks = RTL_HOOKS_INITIALIZER;
|
625 |
|
|
|
626 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer). We check for
|
627 |
|
|
virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
|
628 |
|
|
by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation. */
|
629 |
|
|
|
630 |
|
|
static bool
|
631 |
|
|
fixed_base_plus_p (rtx x)
|
632 |
|
|
{
|
633 |
|
|
switch (GET_CODE (x))
|
634 |
|
|
{
|
635 |
|
|
case REG:
|
636 |
|
|
if (x == frame_pointer_rtx || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx)
|
637 |
|
|
return true;
|
638 |
|
|
if (x == arg_pointer_rtx && fixed_regs[ARG_POINTER_REGNUM])
|
639 |
|
|
return true;
|
640 |
|
|
if (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
|
641 |
|
|
&& REGNO (x) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
|
642 |
|
|
return true;
|
643 |
|
|
return false;
|
644 |
|
|
|
645 |
|
|
case PLUS:
|
646 |
|
|
if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
647 |
|
|
return false;
|
648 |
|
|
return fixed_base_plus_p (XEXP (x, 0));
|
649 |
|
|
|
650 |
|
|
default:
|
651 |
|
|
return false;
|
652 |
|
|
}
|
653 |
|
|
}
|
654 |
|
|
|
655 |
|
|
/* Dump the expressions in the equivalence class indicated by CLASSP.
|
656 |
|
|
This function is used only for debugging. */
|
657 |
|
|
void
|
658 |
|
|
dump_class (struct table_elt *classp)
|
659 |
|
|
{
|
660 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
661 |
|
|
|
662 |
|
|
fprintf (stderr, "Equivalence chain for ");
|
663 |
|
|
print_rtl (stderr, classp->exp);
|
664 |
|
|
fprintf (stderr, ": \n");
|
665 |
|
|
|
666 |
|
|
for (elt = classp->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
|
667 |
|
|
{
|
668 |
|
|
print_rtl (stderr, elt->exp);
|
669 |
|
|
fprintf (stderr, "\n");
|
670 |
|
|
}
|
671 |
|
|
}
|
672 |
|
|
|
673 |
|
|
/* Subroutine of approx_reg_cost; called through for_each_rtx. */
|
674 |
|
|
|
675 |
|
|
static int
|
676 |
|
|
approx_reg_cost_1 (rtx *xp, void *data)
|
677 |
|
|
{
|
678 |
|
|
rtx x = *xp;
|
679 |
|
|
int *cost_p = (int *) data;
|
680 |
|
|
|
681 |
|
|
if (x && REG_P (x))
|
682 |
|
|
{
|
683 |
|
|
unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
|
684 |
|
|
|
685 |
|
|
if (! CHEAP_REGNO (regno))
|
686 |
|
|
{
|
687 |
|
|
if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
688 |
|
|
{
|
689 |
|
|
if (SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
|
690 |
|
|
return 1;
|
691 |
|
|
*cost_p += 2;
|
692 |
|
|
}
|
693 |
|
|
else
|
694 |
|
|
*cost_p += 1;
|
695 |
|
|
}
|
696 |
|
|
}
|
697 |
|
|
|
698 |
|
|
return 0;
|
699 |
|
|
}
|
700 |
|
|
|
701 |
|
|
/* Return an estimate of the cost of the registers used in an rtx.
|
702 |
|
|
This is mostly the number of different REG expressions in the rtx;
|
703 |
|
|
however for some exceptions like fixed registers we use a cost of
|
704 |
|
|
0. If any other hard register reference occurs, return MAX_COST. */
|
705 |
|
|
|
706 |
|
|
static int
|
707 |
|
|
approx_reg_cost (rtx x)
|
708 |
|
|
{
|
709 |
|
|
int cost = 0;
|
710 |
|
|
|
711 |
|
|
if (for_each_rtx (&x, approx_reg_cost_1, (void *) &cost))
|
712 |
|
|
return MAX_COST;
|
713 |
|
|
|
714 |
|
|
return cost;
|
715 |
|
|
}
|
716 |
|
|
|
717 |
|
|
/* Return a negative value if an rtx A, whose costs are given by COST_A
|
718 |
|
|
and REGCOST_A, is more desirable than an rtx B.
|
719 |
|
|
Return a positive value if A is less desirable, or 0 if the two are
|
720 |
|
|
equally good. */
|
721 |
|
|
static int
|
722 |
|
|
preferable (int cost_a, int regcost_a, int cost_b, int regcost_b)
|
723 |
|
|
{
|
724 |
|
|
/* First, get rid of cases involving expressions that are entirely
|
725 |
|
|
unwanted. */
|
726 |
|
|
if (cost_a != cost_b)
|
727 |
|
|
{
|
728 |
|
|
if (cost_a == MAX_COST)
|
729 |
|
|
return 1;
|
730 |
|
|
if (cost_b == MAX_COST)
|
731 |
|
|
return -1;
|
732 |
|
|
}
|
733 |
|
|
|
734 |
|
|
/* Avoid extending lifetimes of hardregs. */
|
735 |
|
|
if (regcost_a != regcost_b)
|
736 |
|
|
{
|
737 |
|
|
if (regcost_a == MAX_COST)
|
738 |
|
|
return 1;
|
739 |
|
|
if (regcost_b == MAX_COST)
|
740 |
|
|
return -1;
|
741 |
|
|
}
|
742 |
|
|
|
743 |
|
|
/* Normal operation costs take precedence. */
|
744 |
|
|
if (cost_a != cost_b)
|
745 |
|
|
return cost_a - cost_b;
|
746 |
|
|
/* Only if these are identical consider effects on register pressure. */
|
747 |
|
|
if (regcost_a != regcost_b)
|
748 |
|
|
return regcost_a - regcost_b;
|
749 |
|
|
return 0;
|
750 |
|
|
}
|
751 |
|
|
|
752 |
|
|
/* Internal function, to compute cost when X is not a register; called
|
753 |
|
|
from COST macro to keep it simple. */
|
754 |
|
|
|
755 |
|
|
static int
|
756 |
|
|
notreg_cost (rtx x, enum rtx_code outer)
|
757 |
|
|
{
|
758 |
|
|
return ((GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
|
759 |
|
|
&& REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
|
760 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT
|
761 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) == MODE_INT
|
762 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
|
763 |
|
|
< GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
|
764 |
|
|
&& subreg_lowpart_p (x)
|
765 |
|
|
&& TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x)),
|
766 |
|
|
GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))))
|
767 |
|
|
? 0
|
768 |
|
|
: rtx_cost (x, outer, optimize_this_for_speed_p) * 2);
|
769 |
|
|
}
|
770 |
|
|
|
771 |
|
|
|
772 |
|
|
/* Initialize CSE_REG_INFO_TABLE. */
|
773 |
|
|
|
774 |
|
|
static void
|
775 |
|
|
init_cse_reg_info (unsigned int nregs)
|
776 |
|
|
{
|
777 |
|
|
/* Do we need to grow the table? */
|
778 |
|
|
if (nregs > cse_reg_info_table_size)
|
779 |
|
|
{
|
780 |
|
|
unsigned int new_size;
|
781 |
|
|
|
782 |
|
|
if (cse_reg_info_table_size < 2048)
|
783 |
|
|
{
|
784 |
|
|
/* Compute a new size that is a power of 2 and no smaller
|
785 |
|
|
than the large of NREGS and 64. */
|
786 |
|
|
new_size = (cse_reg_info_table_size
|
787 |
|
|
? cse_reg_info_table_size : 64);
|
788 |
|
|
|
789 |
|
|
while (new_size < nregs)
|
790 |
|
|
new_size *= 2;
|
791 |
|
|
}
|
792 |
|
|
else
|
793 |
|
|
{
|
794 |
|
|
/* If we need a big table, allocate just enough to hold
|
795 |
|
|
NREGS registers. */
|
796 |
|
|
new_size = nregs;
|
797 |
|
|
}
|
798 |
|
|
|
799 |
|
|
/* Reallocate the table with NEW_SIZE entries. */
|
800 |
|
|
if (cse_reg_info_table)
|
801 |
|
|
free (cse_reg_info_table);
|
802 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table = XNEWVEC (struct cse_reg_info, new_size);
|
803 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table_size = new_size;
|
804 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized = 0;
|
805 |
|
|
}
|
806 |
|
|
|
807 |
|
|
/* Do we have all of the first NREGS entries initialized? */
|
808 |
|
|
if (cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized < nregs)
|
809 |
|
|
{
|
810 |
|
|
unsigned int old_timestamp = cse_reg_info_timestamp - 1;
|
811 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
812 |
|
|
|
813 |
|
|
/* Put the old timestamp on newly allocated entries so that they
|
814 |
|
|
will all be considered out of date. We do not touch those
|
815 |
|
|
entries beyond the first NREGS entries to be nice to the
|
816 |
|
|
virtual memory. */
|
817 |
|
|
for (i = cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized; i < nregs; i++)
|
818 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table[i].timestamp = old_timestamp;
|
819 |
|
|
|
820 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized = nregs;
|
821 |
|
|
}
|
822 |
|
|
}
|
823 |
|
|
|
824 |
|
|
/* Given REGNO, initialize the cse_reg_info entry for REGNO. */
|
825 |
|
|
|
826 |
|
|
static void
|
827 |
|
|
get_cse_reg_info_1 (unsigned int regno)
|
828 |
|
|
{
|
829 |
|
|
/* Set TIMESTAMP field to CSE_REG_INFO_TIMESTAMP so that this
|
830 |
|
|
entry will be considered to have been initialized. */
|
831 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table[regno].timestamp = cse_reg_info_timestamp;
|
832 |
|
|
|
833 |
|
|
/* Initialize the rest of the entry. */
|
834 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_tick = 1;
|
835 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_in_table = -1;
|
836 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table[regno].subreg_ticked = -1;
|
837 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_qty = -regno - 1;
|
838 |
|
|
}
|
839 |
|
|
|
840 |
|
|
/* Find a cse_reg_info entry for REGNO. */
|
841 |
|
|
|
842 |
|
|
static inline struct cse_reg_info *
|
843 |
|
|
get_cse_reg_info (unsigned int regno)
|
844 |
|
|
{
|
845 |
|
|
struct cse_reg_info *p = &cse_reg_info_table[regno];
|
846 |
|
|
|
847 |
|
|
/* If this entry has not been initialized, go ahead and initialize
|
848 |
|
|
it. */
|
849 |
|
|
if (p->timestamp != cse_reg_info_timestamp)
|
850 |
|
|
get_cse_reg_info_1 (regno);
|
851 |
|
|
|
852 |
|
|
return p;
|
853 |
|
|
}
|
854 |
|
|
|
855 |
|
|
/* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
|
856 |
|
|
for a new basic block. */
|
857 |
|
|
|
858 |
|
|
static void
|
859 |
|
|
new_basic_block (void)
|
860 |
|
|
{
|
861 |
|
|
int i;
|
862 |
|
|
|
863 |
|
|
next_qty = 0;
|
864 |
|
|
|
865 |
|
|
/* Invalidate cse_reg_info_table. */
|
866 |
|
|
cse_reg_info_timestamp++;
|
867 |
|
|
|
868 |
|
|
/* Clear out hash table state for this pass. */
|
869 |
|
|
CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
|
870 |
|
|
|
871 |
|
|
/* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
|
872 |
|
|
much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'. */
|
873 |
|
|
|
874 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
|
875 |
|
|
{
|
876 |
|
|
struct table_elt *first;
|
877 |
|
|
|
878 |
|
|
first = table[i];
|
879 |
|
|
if (first != NULL)
|
880 |
|
|
{
|
881 |
|
|
struct table_elt *last = first;
|
882 |
|
|
|
883 |
|
|
table[i] = NULL;
|
884 |
|
|
|
885 |
|
|
while (last->next_same_hash != NULL)
|
886 |
|
|
last = last->next_same_hash;
|
887 |
|
|
|
888 |
|
|
/* Now relink this hash entire chain into
|
889 |
|
|
the free element list. */
|
890 |
|
|
|
891 |
|
|
last->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
|
892 |
|
|
free_element_chain = first;
|
893 |
|
|
}
|
894 |
|
|
}
|
895 |
|
|
|
896 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
897 |
|
|
prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
|
898 |
|
|
#endif
|
899 |
|
|
}
|
900 |
|
|
|
901 |
|
|
/* Say that register REG contains a quantity in mode MODE not in any
|
902 |
|
|
register before and initialize that quantity. */
|
903 |
|
|
|
904 |
|
|
static void
|
905 |
|
|
make_new_qty (unsigned int reg, enum machine_mode mode)
|
906 |
|
|
{
|
907 |
|
|
int q;
|
908 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *ent;
|
909 |
|
|
struct reg_eqv_elem *eqv;
|
910 |
|
|
|
911 |
|
|
gcc_assert (next_qty < max_qty);
|
912 |
|
|
|
913 |
|
|
q = REG_QTY (reg) = next_qty++;
|
914 |
|
|
ent = &qty_table[q];
|
915 |
|
|
ent->first_reg = reg;
|
916 |
|
|
ent->last_reg = reg;
|
917 |
|
|
ent->mode = mode;
|
918 |
|
|
ent->const_rtx = ent->const_insn = NULL_RTX;
|
919 |
|
|
ent->comparison_code = UNKNOWN;
|
920 |
|
|
|
921 |
|
|
eqv = ®_eqv_table[reg];
|
922 |
|
|
eqv->next = eqv->prev = -1;
|
923 |
|
|
}
|
924 |
|
|
|
925 |
|
|
/* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
|
926 |
|
|
OLD is not changing; NEW is. */
|
927 |
|
|
|
928 |
|
|
static void
|
929 |
|
|
make_regs_eqv (unsigned int new_reg, unsigned int old_reg)
|
930 |
|
|
{
|
931 |
|
|
unsigned int lastr, firstr;
|
932 |
|
|
int q = REG_QTY (old_reg);
|
933 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *ent;
|
934 |
|
|
|
935 |
|
|
ent = &qty_table[q];
|
936 |
|
|
|
937 |
|
|
/* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number. */
|
938 |
|
|
gcc_assert (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old_reg));
|
939 |
|
|
|
940 |
|
|
REG_QTY (new_reg) = q;
|
941 |
|
|
firstr = ent->first_reg;
|
942 |
|
|
lastr = ent->last_reg;
|
943 |
|
|
|
944 |
|
|
/* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything. Prefer pseudo regs to other
|
945 |
|
|
hard regs. Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
|
946 |
|
|
of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
|
947 |
|
|
make it the new canonical replacement for this qty. */
|
948 |
|
|
if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
|
949 |
|
|
/* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS. This means
|
950 |
|
|
that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
|
951 |
|
|
they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
|
952 |
|
|
either. */
|
953 |
|
|
&& (new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new_reg) != NO_REGS)
|
954 |
|
|
&& ((new_reg < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new_reg))
|
955 |
|
|
|| (new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
956 |
|
|
&& (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
957 |
|
|
|| (bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_out, new_reg)
|
958 |
|
|
&& !bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_out, firstr))
|
959 |
|
|
|| (bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_in, new_reg)
|
960 |
|
|
&& !bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_in, firstr))))))
|
961 |
|
|
{
|
962 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table[firstr].prev = new_reg;
|
963 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table[new_reg].next = firstr;
|
964 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table[new_reg].prev = -1;
|
965 |
|
|
ent->first_reg = new_reg;
|
966 |
|
|
}
|
967 |
|
|
else
|
968 |
|
|
{
|
969 |
|
|
/* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
|
970 |
|
|
Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
|
971 |
|
|
end. Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
|
972 |
|
|
equivalent for anything. */
|
973 |
|
|
while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_eqv_table[lastr].prev >= 0
|
974 |
|
|
&& (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
|
975 |
|
|
&& new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
976 |
|
|
lastr = reg_eqv_table[lastr].prev;
|
977 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table[new_reg].next = reg_eqv_table[lastr].next;
|
978 |
|
|
if (reg_eqv_table[lastr].next >= 0)
|
979 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table[reg_eqv_table[lastr].next].prev = new_reg;
|
980 |
|
|
else
|
981 |
|
|
qty_table[q].last_reg = new_reg;
|
982 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table[lastr].next = new_reg;
|
983 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table[new_reg].prev = lastr;
|
984 |
|
|
}
|
985 |
|
|
}
|
986 |
|
|
|
987 |
|
|
/* Remove REG from its equivalence class. */
|
988 |
|
|
|
989 |
|
|
static void
|
990 |
|
|
delete_reg_equiv (unsigned int reg)
|
991 |
|
|
{
|
992 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *ent;
|
993 |
|
|
int q = REG_QTY (reg);
|
994 |
|
|
int p, n;
|
995 |
|
|
|
996 |
|
|
/* If invalid, do nothing. */
|
997 |
|
|
if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (reg))
|
998 |
|
|
return;
|
999 |
|
|
|
1000 |
|
|
ent = &qty_table[q];
|
1001 |
|
|
|
1002 |
|
|
p = reg_eqv_table[reg].prev;
|
1003 |
|
|
n = reg_eqv_table[reg].next;
|
1004 |
|
|
|
1005 |
|
|
if (n != -1)
|
1006 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table[n].prev = p;
|
1007 |
|
|
else
|
1008 |
|
|
ent->last_reg = p;
|
1009 |
|
|
if (p != -1)
|
1010 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table[p].next = n;
|
1011 |
|
|
else
|
1012 |
|
|
ent->first_reg = n;
|
1013 |
|
|
|
1014 |
|
|
REG_QTY (reg) = -reg - 1;
|
1015 |
|
|
}
|
1016 |
|
|
|
1017 |
|
|
/* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
|
1018 |
|
|
that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
|
1019 |
|
|
|
1020 |
|
|
Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
|
1021 |
|
|
as subexpressions will be considered valid.
|
1022 |
|
|
|
1023 |
|
|
mention_regs is not called when a register itself
|
1024 |
|
|
is being stored in the table.
|
1025 |
|
|
|
1026 |
|
|
Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
|
1027 |
|
|
of X. */
|
1028 |
|
|
|
1029 |
|
|
static int
|
1030 |
|
|
mention_regs (rtx x)
|
1031 |
|
|
{
|
1032 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
1033 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
1034 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
1035 |
|
|
int changed = 0;
|
1036 |
|
|
|
1037 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
1038 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1039 |
|
|
|
1040 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
1041 |
|
|
if (code == REG)
|
1042 |
|
|
{
|
1043 |
|
|
unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
|
1044 |
|
|
unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
|
1045 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
1046 |
|
|
|
1047 |
|
|
for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
|
1048 |
|
|
{
|
1049 |
|
|
if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0 && REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
|
1050 |
|
|
remove_invalid_refs (i);
|
1051 |
|
|
|
1052 |
|
|
REG_IN_TABLE (i) = REG_TICK (i);
|
1053 |
|
|
SUBREG_TICKED (i) = -1;
|
1054 |
|
|
}
|
1055 |
|
|
|
1056 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1057 |
|
|
}
|
1058 |
|
|
|
1059 |
|
|
/* If this is a SUBREG, we don't want to discard other SUBREGs of the same
|
1060 |
|
|
pseudo if they don't use overlapping words. We handle only pseudos
|
1061 |
|
|
here for simplicity. */
|
1062 |
|
|
if (code == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
|
1063 |
|
|
&& REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
1064 |
|
|
{
|
1065 |
|
|
unsigned int i = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
|
1066 |
|
|
|
1067 |
|
|
if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0 && REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
|
1068 |
|
|
{
|
1069 |
|
|
/* If REG_IN_TABLE (i) differs from REG_TICK (i) by one, and
|
1070 |
|
|
the last store to this register really stored into this
|
1071 |
|
|
subreg, then remove the memory of this subreg.
|
1072 |
|
|
Otherwise, remove any memory of the entire register and
|
1073 |
|
|
all its subregs from the table. */
|
1074 |
|
|
if (REG_TICK (i) - REG_IN_TABLE (i) > 1
|
1075 |
|
|
|| SUBREG_TICKED (i) != REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)))
|
1076 |
|
|
remove_invalid_refs (i);
|
1077 |
|
|
else
|
1078 |
|
|
remove_invalid_subreg_refs (i, SUBREG_BYTE (x), GET_MODE (x));
|
1079 |
|
|
}
|
1080 |
|
|
|
1081 |
|
|
REG_IN_TABLE (i) = REG_TICK (i);
|
1082 |
|
|
SUBREG_TICKED (i) = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
|
1083 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1084 |
|
|
}
|
1085 |
|
|
|
1086 |
|
|
/* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
|
1087 |
|
|
that does not have a quantity, give it one. This is so that a later
|
1088 |
|
|
call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
|
1089 |
|
|
hash code and not found in the table after that call.
|
1090 |
|
|
|
1091 |
|
|
It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
|
1092 |
|
|
fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
|
1093 |
|
|
call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
|
1094 |
|
|
use of the register is in the comparison. */
|
1095 |
|
|
|
1096 |
|
|
if (code == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (x))
|
1097 |
|
|
{
|
1098 |
|
|
if (REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
|
1099 |
|
|
&& ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
|
1100 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), NULL, 0))
|
1101 |
|
|
{
|
1102 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
|
1103 |
|
|
changed = 1;
|
1104 |
|
|
}
|
1105 |
|
|
|
1106 |
|
|
if (REG_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
1107 |
|
|
&& ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
|
1108 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), NULL, 0))
|
1109 |
|
|
{
|
1110 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
|
1111 |
|
|
changed = 1;
|
1112 |
|
|
}
|
1113 |
|
|
}
|
1114 |
|
|
|
1115 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
1116 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
1117 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
1118 |
|
|
changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
|
1119 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
1120 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
1121 |
|
|
changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
|
1122 |
|
|
|
1123 |
|
|
return changed;
|
1124 |
|
|
}
|
1125 |
|
|
|
1126 |
|
|
/* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
|
1127 |
|
|
with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
|
1128 |
|
|
(If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
|
1129 |
|
|
If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
|
1130 |
|
|
Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
|
1131 |
|
|
before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
|
1132 |
|
|
|
1133 |
|
|
Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
|
1134 |
|
|
so X's hash code may be different. */
|
1135 |
|
|
|
1136 |
|
|
static int
|
1137 |
|
|
insert_regs (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, int modified)
|
1138 |
|
|
{
|
1139 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x))
|
1140 |
|
|
{
|
1141 |
|
|
unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
|
1142 |
|
|
int qty_valid;
|
1143 |
|
|
|
1144 |
|
|
/* If REGNO is in the equivalence table already but is of the
|
1145 |
|
|
wrong mode for that equivalence, don't do anything here. */
|
1146 |
|
|
|
1147 |
|
|
qty_valid = REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno);
|
1148 |
|
|
if (qty_valid)
|
1149 |
|
|
{
|
1150 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[REG_QTY (regno)];
|
1151 |
|
|
|
1152 |
|
|
if (ent->mode != GET_MODE (x))
|
1153 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1154 |
|
|
}
|
1155 |
|
|
|
1156 |
|
|
if (modified || ! qty_valid)
|
1157 |
|
|
{
|
1158 |
|
|
if (classp)
|
1159 |
|
|
for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
|
1160 |
|
|
classp != 0;
|
1161 |
|
|
classp = classp->next_same_value)
|
1162 |
|
|
if (REG_P (classp->exp)
|
1163 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
|
1164 |
|
|
{
|
1165 |
|
|
unsigned c_regno = REGNO (classp->exp);
|
1166 |
|
|
|
1167 |
|
|
gcc_assert (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (c_regno));
|
1168 |
|
|
|
1169 |
|
|
/* Suppose that 5 is hard reg and 100 and 101 are
|
1170 |
|
|
pseudos. Consider
|
1171 |
|
|
|
1172 |
|
|
(set (reg:si 100) (reg:si 5))
|
1173 |
|
|
(set (reg:si 5) (reg:si 100))
|
1174 |
|
|
(set (reg:di 101) (reg:di 5))
|
1175 |
|
|
|
1176 |
|
|
We would now set REG_QTY (101) = REG_QTY (5), but the
|
1177 |
|
|
entry for 5 is in SImode. When we use this later in
|
1178 |
|
|
copy propagation, we get the register in wrong mode. */
|
1179 |
|
|
if (qty_table[REG_QTY (c_regno)].mode != GET_MODE (x))
|
1180 |
|
|
continue;
|
1181 |
|
|
|
1182 |
|
|
make_regs_eqv (regno, c_regno);
|
1183 |
|
|
return 1;
|
1184 |
|
|
}
|
1185 |
|
|
|
1186 |
|
|
/* Mention_regs for a SUBREG checks if REG_TICK is exactly one larger
|
1187 |
|
|
than REG_IN_TABLE to find out if there was only a single preceding
|
1188 |
|
|
invalidation - for the SUBREG - or another one, which would be
|
1189 |
|
|
for the full register. However, if we find here that REG_TICK
|
1190 |
|
|
indicates that the register is invalid, it means that it has
|
1191 |
|
|
been invalidated in a separate operation. The SUBREG might be used
|
1192 |
|
|
now (then this is a recursive call), or we might use the full REG
|
1193 |
|
|
now and a SUBREG of it later. So bump up REG_TICK so that
|
1194 |
|
|
mention_regs will do the right thing. */
|
1195 |
|
|
if (! modified
|
1196 |
|
|
&& REG_IN_TABLE (regno) >= 0
|
1197 |
|
|
&& REG_TICK (regno) == REG_IN_TABLE (regno) + 1)
|
1198 |
|
|
REG_TICK (regno)++;
|
1199 |
|
|
make_new_qty (regno, GET_MODE (x));
|
1200 |
|
|
return 1;
|
1201 |
|
|
}
|
1202 |
|
|
|
1203 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1204 |
|
|
}
|
1205 |
|
|
|
1206 |
|
|
/* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
|
1207 |
|
|
table. If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
|
1208 |
|
|
this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
|
1209 |
|
|
not be accessible because its hash code will have changed. So assign
|
1210 |
|
|
a quantity number now. */
|
1211 |
|
|
|
1212 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
|
1213 |
|
|
&& ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
|
1214 |
|
|
{
|
1215 |
|
|
insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), NULL, 0);
|
1216 |
|
|
mention_regs (x);
|
1217 |
|
|
return 1;
|
1218 |
|
|
}
|
1219 |
|
|
else
|
1220 |
|
|
return mention_regs (x);
|
1221 |
|
|
}
|
1222 |
|
|
|
1223 |
|
|
|
1224 |
|
|
/* Compute upper and lower anchors for CST. Also compute the offset of CST
|
1225 |
|
|
from these anchors/bases such that *_BASE + *_OFFS = CST. Return false iff
|
1226 |
|
|
CST is equal to an anchor. */
|
1227 |
|
|
|
1228 |
|
|
static bool
|
1229 |
|
|
compute_const_anchors (rtx cst,
|
1230 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT *lower_base, HOST_WIDE_INT *lower_offs,
|
1231 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT *upper_base, HOST_WIDE_INT *upper_offs)
|
1232 |
|
|
{
|
1233 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT n = INTVAL (cst);
|
1234 |
|
|
|
1235 |
|
|
*lower_base = n & ~(targetm.const_anchor - 1);
|
1236 |
|
|
if (*lower_base == n)
|
1237 |
|
|
return false;
|
1238 |
|
|
|
1239 |
|
|
*upper_base =
|
1240 |
|
|
(n + (targetm.const_anchor - 1)) & ~(targetm.const_anchor - 1);
|
1241 |
|
|
*upper_offs = n - *upper_base;
|
1242 |
|
|
*lower_offs = n - *lower_base;
|
1243 |
|
|
return true;
|
1244 |
|
|
}
|
1245 |
|
|
|
1246 |
|
|
/* Insert the equivalence between ANCHOR and (REG + OFF) in mode MODE. */
|
1247 |
|
|
|
1248 |
|
|
static void
|
1249 |
|
|
insert_const_anchor (HOST_WIDE_INT anchor, rtx reg, HOST_WIDE_INT offs,
|
1250 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode)
|
1251 |
|
|
{
|
1252 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
1253 |
|
|
unsigned hash;
|
1254 |
|
|
rtx anchor_exp;
|
1255 |
|
|
rtx exp;
|
1256 |
|
|
|
1257 |
|
|
anchor_exp = GEN_INT (anchor);
|
1258 |
|
|
hash = HASH (anchor_exp, mode);
|
1259 |
|
|
elt = lookup (anchor_exp, hash, mode);
|
1260 |
|
|
if (!elt)
|
1261 |
|
|
elt = insert (anchor_exp, NULL, hash, mode);
|
1262 |
|
|
|
1263 |
|
|
exp = plus_constant (reg, offs);
|
1264 |
|
|
/* REG has just been inserted and the hash codes recomputed. */
|
1265 |
|
|
mention_regs (exp);
|
1266 |
|
|
hash = HASH (exp, mode);
|
1267 |
|
|
|
1268 |
|
|
/* Use the cost of the register rather than the whole expression. When
|
1269 |
|
|
looking up constant anchors we will further offset the corresponding
|
1270 |
|
|
expression therefore it does not make sense to prefer REGs over
|
1271 |
|
|
reg-immediate additions. Prefer instead the oldest expression. Also
|
1272 |
|
|
don't prefer pseudos over hard regs so that we derive constants in
|
1273 |
|
|
argument registers from other argument registers rather than from the
|
1274 |
|
|
original pseudo that was used to synthesize the constant. */
|
1275 |
|
|
insert_with_costs (exp, elt, hash, mode, COST (reg), 1);
|
1276 |
|
|
}
|
1277 |
|
|
|
1278 |
|
|
/* The constant CST is equivalent to the register REG. Create
|
1279 |
|
|
equivalences between the two anchors of CST and the corresponding
|
1280 |
|
|
register-offset expressions using REG. */
|
1281 |
|
|
|
1282 |
|
|
static void
|
1283 |
|
|
insert_const_anchors (rtx reg, rtx cst, enum machine_mode mode)
|
1284 |
|
|
{
|
1285 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT lower_base, lower_offs, upper_base, upper_offs;
|
1286 |
|
|
|
1287 |
|
|
if (!compute_const_anchors (cst, &lower_base, &lower_offs,
|
1288 |
|
|
&upper_base, &upper_offs))
|
1289 |
|
|
return;
|
1290 |
|
|
|
1291 |
|
|
/* Ignore anchors of value 0. Constants accessible from zero are
|
1292 |
|
|
simple. */
|
1293 |
|
|
if (lower_base != 0)
|
1294 |
|
|
insert_const_anchor (lower_base, reg, -lower_offs, mode);
|
1295 |
|
|
|
1296 |
|
|
if (upper_base != 0)
|
1297 |
|
|
insert_const_anchor (upper_base, reg, -upper_offs, mode);
|
1298 |
|
|
}
|
1299 |
|
|
|
1300 |
|
|
/* We need to express ANCHOR_ELT->exp + OFFS. Walk the equivalence list of
|
1301 |
|
|
ANCHOR_ELT and see if offsetting any of the entries by OFFS would create a
|
1302 |
|
|
valid expression. Return the cheapest and oldest of such expressions. In
|
1303 |
|
|
*OLD, return how old the resulting expression is compared to the other
|
1304 |
|
|
equivalent expressions. */
|
1305 |
|
|
|
1306 |
|
|
static rtx
|
1307 |
|
|
find_reg_offset_for_const (struct table_elt *anchor_elt, HOST_WIDE_INT offs,
|
1308 |
|
|
unsigned *old)
|
1309 |
|
|
{
|
1310 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
1311 |
|
|
unsigned idx;
|
1312 |
|
|
struct table_elt *match_elt;
|
1313 |
|
|
rtx match;
|
1314 |
|
|
|
1315 |
|
|
/* Find the cheapest and *oldest* expression to maximize the chance of
|
1316 |
|
|
reusing the same pseudo. */
|
1317 |
|
|
|
1318 |
|
|
match_elt = NULL;
|
1319 |
|
|
match = NULL_RTX;
|
1320 |
|
|
for (elt = anchor_elt->first_same_value, idx = 0;
|
1321 |
|
|
elt;
|
1322 |
|
|
elt = elt->next_same_value, idx++)
|
1323 |
|
|
{
|
1324 |
|
|
if (match_elt && CHEAPER (match_elt, elt))
|
1325 |
|
|
return match;
|
1326 |
|
|
|
1327 |
|
|
if (REG_P (elt->exp)
|
1328 |
|
|
|| (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == PLUS
|
1329 |
|
|
&& REG_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))
|
1330 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == CONST_INT))
|
1331 |
|
|
{
|
1332 |
|
|
rtx x;
|
1333 |
|
|
|
1334 |
|
|
/* Ignore expressions that are no longer valid. */
|
1335 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (elt->exp) && !exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
|
1336 |
|
|
continue;
|
1337 |
|
|
|
1338 |
|
|
x = plus_constant (elt->exp, offs);
|
1339 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x)
|
1340 |
|
|
|| (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
|
1341 |
|
|
&& IN_RANGE (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)),
|
1342 |
|
|
-targetm.const_anchor,
|
1343 |
|
|
targetm.const_anchor - 1)))
|
1344 |
|
|
{
|
1345 |
|
|
match = x;
|
1346 |
|
|
match_elt = elt;
|
1347 |
|
|
*old = idx;
|
1348 |
|
|
}
|
1349 |
|
|
}
|
1350 |
|
|
}
|
1351 |
|
|
|
1352 |
|
|
return match;
|
1353 |
|
|
}
|
1354 |
|
|
|
1355 |
|
|
/* Try to express the constant SRC_CONST using a register+offset expression
|
1356 |
|
|
derived from a constant anchor. Return it if successful or NULL_RTX,
|
1357 |
|
|
otherwise. */
|
1358 |
|
|
|
1359 |
|
|
static rtx
|
1360 |
|
|
try_const_anchors (rtx src_const, enum machine_mode mode)
|
1361 |
|
|
{
|
1362 |
|
|
struct table_elt *lower_elt, *upper_elt;
|
1363 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT lower_base, lower_offs, upper_base, upper_offs;
|
1364 |
|
|
rtx lower_anchor_rtx, upper_anchor_rtx;
|
1365 |
|
|
rtx lower_exp = NULL_RTX, upper_exp = NULL_RTX;
|
1366 |
|
|
unsigned lower_old, upper_old;
|
1367 |
|
|
|
1368 |
|
|
if (!compute_const_anchors (src_const, &lower_base, &lower_offs,
|
1369 |
|
|
&upper_base, &upper_offs))
|
1370 |
|
|
return NULL_RTX;
|
1371 |
|
|
|
1372 |
|
|
lower_anchor_rtx = GEN_INT (lower_base);
|
1373 |
|
|
upper_anchor_rtx = GEN_INT (upper_base);
|
1374 |
|
|
lower_elt = lookup (lower_anchor_rtx, HASH (lower_anchor_rtx, mode), mode);
|
1375 |
|
|
upper_elt = lookup (upper_anchor_rtx, HASH (upper_anchor_rtx, mode), mode);
|
1376 |
|
|
|
1377 |
|
|
if (lower_elt)
|
1378 |
|
|
lower_exp = find_reg_offset_for_const (lower_elt, lower_offs, &lower_old);
|
1379 |
|
|
if (upper_elt)
|
1380 |
|
|
upper_exp = find_reg_offset_for_const (upper_elt, upper_offs, &upper_old);
|
1381 |
|
|
|
1382 |
|
|
if (!lower_exp)
|
1383 |
|
|
return upper_exp;
|
1384 |
|
|
if (!upper_exp)
|
1385 |
|
|
return lower_exp;
|
1386 |
|
|
|
1387 |
|
|
/* Return the older expression. */
|
1388 |
|
|
return (upper_old > lower_old ? upper_exp : lower_exp);
|
1389 |
|
|
}
|
1390 |
|
|
|
1391 |
|
|
/* Look in or update the hash table. */
|
1392 |
|
|
|
1393 |
|
|
/* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
|
1394 |
|
|
HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
|
1395 |
|
|
It's an argument because often that is known in advance
|
1396 |
|
|
and we save much time not recomputing it. */
|
1397 |
|
|
|
1398 |
|
|
static void
|
1399 |
|
|
remove_from_table (struct table_elt *elt, unsigned int hash)
|
1400 |
|
|
{
|
1401 |
|
|
if (elt == 0)
|
1402 |
|
|
return;
|
1403 |
|
|
|
1404 |
|
|
/* Mark this element as removed. See cse_insn. */
|
1405 |
|
|
elt->first_same_value = 0;
|
1406 |
|
|
|
1407 |
|
|
/* Remove the table element from its equivalence class. */
|
1408 |
|
|
|
1409 |
|
|
{
|
1410 |
|
|
struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
|
1411 |
|
|
struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
|
1412 |
|
|
|
1413 |
|
|
if (next)
|
1414 |
|
|
next->prev_same_value = prev;
|
1415 |
|
|
|
1416 |
|
|
if (prev)
|
1417 |
|
|
prev->next_same_value = next;
|
1418 |
|
|
else
|
1419 |
|
|
{
|
1420 |
|
|
struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
|
1421 |
|
|
while (next)
|
1422 |
|
|
{
|
1423 |
|
|
next->first_same_value = newfirst;
|
1424 |
|
|
next = next->next_same_value;
|
1425 |
|
|
}
|
1426 |
|
|
}
|
1427 |
|
|
}
|
1428 |
|
|
|
1429 |
|
|
/* Remove the table element from its hash bucket. */
|
1430 |
|
|
|
1431 |
|
|
{
|
1432 |
|
|
struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
|
1433 |
|
|
struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
|
1434 |
|
|
|
1435 |
|
|
if (next)
|
1436 |
|
|
next->prev_same_hash = prev;
|
1437 |
|
|
|
1438 |
|
|
if (prev)
|
1439 |
|
|
prev->next_same_hash = next;
|
1440 |
|
|
else if (table[hash] == elt)
|
1441 |
|
|
table[hash] = next;
|
1442 |
|
|
else
|
1443 |
|
|
{
|
1444 |
|
|
/* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket. This can happen
|
1445 |
|
|
when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'. Search
|
1446 |
|
|
for the hash bucket that it heads. This happens only very
|
1447 |
|
|
rarely, so the cost is acceptable. */
|
1448 |
|
|
for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
|
1449 |
|
|
if (table[hash] == elt)
|
1450 |
|
|
table[hash] = next;
|
1451 |
|
|
}
|
1452 |
|
|
}
|
1453 |
|
|
|
1454 |
|
|
/* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain. */
|
1455 |
|
|
|
1456 |
|
|
if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
|
1457 |
|
|
{
|
1458 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
|
1459 |
|
|
|
1460 |
|
|
while (p->related_value != elt)
|
1461 |
|
|
p = p->related_value;
|
1462 |
|
|
p->related_value = elt->related_value;
|
1463 |
|
|
if (p->related_value == p)
|
1464 |
|
|
p->related_value = 0;
|
1465 |
|
|
}
|
1466 |
|
|
|
1467 |
|
|
/* Now add it to the free element chain. */
|
1468 |
|
|
elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
|
1469 |
|
|
free_element_chain = elt;
|
1470 |
|
|
}
|
1471 |
|
|
|
1472 |
|
|
/* Same as above, but X is a pseudo-register. */
|
1473 |
|
|
|
1474 |
|
|
static void
|
1475 |
|
|
remove_pseudo_from_table (rtx x, unsigned int hash)
|
1476 |
|
|
{
|
1477 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
1478 |
|
|
|
1479 |
|
|
/* Because a pseudo-register can be referenced in more than one
|
1480 |
|
|
mode, we might have to remove more than one table entry. */
|
1481 |
|
|
while ((elt = lookup_for_remove (x, hash, VOIDmode)))
|
1482 |
|
|
remove_from_table (elt, hash);
|
1483 |
|
|
}
|
1484 |
|
|
|
1485 |
|
|
/* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
|
1486 |
|
|
or 0 if X is not in the table.
|
1487 |
|
|
|
1488 |
|
|
MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
|
1489 |
|
|
with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
|
1490 |
|
|
|
1491 |
|
|
Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
|
1492 |
|
|
looks like X. */
|
1493 |
|
|
|
1494 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *
|
1495 |
|
|
lookup (rtx x, unsigned int hash, enum machine_mode mode)
|
1496 |
|
|
{
|
1497 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p;
|
1498 |
|
|
|
1499 |
|
|
for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
|
1500 |
|
|
if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && REG_P (x))
|
1501 |
|
|
|| exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, !REG_P (x), false)))
|
1502 |
|
|
return p;
|
1503 |
|
|
|
1504 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1505 |
|
|
}
|
1506 |
|
|
|
1507 |
|
|
/* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
|
1508 |
|
|
Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register. */
|
1509 |
|
|
|
1510 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *
|
1511 |
|
|
lookup_for_remove (rtx x, unsigned int hash, enum machine_mode mode)
|
1512 |
|
|
{
|
1513 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p;
|
1514 |
|
|
|
1515 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x))
|
1516 |
|
|
{
|
1517 |
|
|
unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
|
1518 |
|
|
|
1519 |
|
|
/* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
|
1520 |
|
|
invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0). */
|
1521 |
|
|
for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
|
1522 |
|
|
if (REG_P (p->exp)
|
1523 |
|
|
&& REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
|
1524 |
|
|
return p;
|
1525 |
|
|
}
|
1526 |
|
|
else
|
1527 |
|
|
{
|
1528 |
|
|
for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
|
1529 |
|
|
if (mode == p->mode
|
1530 |
|
|
&& (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, false)))
|
1531 |
|
|
return p;
|
1532 |
|
|
}
|
1533 |
|
|
|
1534 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1535 |
|
|
}
|
1536 |
|
|
|
1537 |
|
|
/* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
|
1538 |
|
|
If one is found, return that expression. */
|
1539 |
|
|
|
1540 |
|
|
static rtx
|
1541 |
|
|
lookup_as_function (rtx x, enum rtx_code code)
|
1542 |
|
|
{
|
1543 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p
|
1544 |
|
|
= lookup (x, SAFE_HASH (x, VOIDmode), GET_MODE (x));
|
1545 |
|
|
|
1546 |
|
|
if (p == 0)
|
1547 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1548 |
|
|
|
1549 |
|
|
for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
|
1550 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
|
1551 |
|
|
/* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table. */
|
1552 |
|
|
&& exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
|
1553 |
|
|
return p->exp;
|
1554 |
|
|
|
1555 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1556 |
|
|
}
|
1557 |
|
|
|
1558 |
|
|
/* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code and
|
1559 |
|
|
CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in (or 0 if a new
|
1560 |
|
|
class should be made). COST is the code of X and reg_cost is the
|
1561 |
|
|
cost of registers in X. It is inserted at the proper position to
|
1562 |
|
|
keep the class in the order cheapest first.
|
1563 |
|
|
|
1564 |
|
|
MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
|
1565 |
|
|
with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
|
1566 |
|
|
|
1567 |
|
|
For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
|
1568 |
|
|
goes in front, except that the first element in the list
|
1569 |
|
|
remains first unless a cheaper element is added. The order of
|
1570 |
|
|
pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
|
1571 |
|
|
find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
|
1572 |
|
|
|
1573 |
|
|
The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
|
1574 |
|
|
The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
|
1575 |
|
|
|
1576 |
|
|
You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
|
1577 |
|
|
and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
|
1578 |
|
|
you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
|
1579 |
|
|
|
1580 |
|
|
If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities. */
|
1581 |
|
|
|
1582 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *
|
1583 |
|
|
insert_with_costs (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, unsigned int hash,
|
1584 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode, int cost, int reg_cost)
|
1585 |
|
|
{
|
1586 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
1587 |
|
|
|
1588 |
|
|
/* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
|
1589 |
|
|
something is wrong. */
|
1590 |
|
|
gcc_assert (!REG_P (x) || REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)));
|
1591 |
|
|
|
1592 |
|
|
/* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table. */
|
1593 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
1594 |
|
|
add_to_hard_reg_set (&hard_regs_in_table, GET_MODE (x), REGNO (x));
|
1595 |
|
|
|
1596 |
|
|
/* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket. */
|
1597 |
|
|
|
1598 |
|
|
elt = free_element_chain;
|
1599 |
|
|
if (elt)
|
1600 |
|
|
free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
|
1601 |
|
|
else
|
1602 |
|
|
elt = XNEW (struct table_elt);
|
1603 |
|
|
|
1604 |
|
|
elt->exp = x;
|
1605 |
|
|
elt->canon_exp = NULL_RTX;
|
1606 |
|
|
elt->cost = cost;
|
1607 |
|
|
elt->regcost = reg_cost;
|
1608 |
|
|
elt->next_same_value = 0;
|
1609 |
|
|
elt->prev_same_value = 0;
|
1610 |
|
|
elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
|
1611 |
|
|
elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
|
1612 |
|
|
elt->related_value = 0;
|
1613 |
|
|
elt->in_memory = 0;
|
1614 |
|
|
elt->mode = mode;
|
1615 |
|
|
elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x) || fixed_base_plus_p (x));
|
1616 |
|
|
|
1617 |
|
|
if (table[hash])
|
1618 |
|
|
table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
|
1619 |
|
|
table[hash] = elt;
|
1620 |
|
|
|
1621 |
|
|
/* Put it into the proper value-class. */
|
1622 |
|
|
if (classp)
|
1623 |
|
|
{
|
1624 |
|
|
classp = classp->first_same_value;
|
1625 |
|
|
if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
|
1626 |
|
|
/* Insert at the head of the class. */
|
1627 |
|
|
{
|
1628 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p;
|
1629 |
|
|
elt->next_same_value = classp;
|
1630 |
|
|
classp->prev_same_value = elt;
|
1631 |
|
|
elt->first_same_value = elt;
|
1632 |
|
|
|
1633 |
|
|
for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
|
1634 |
|
|
p->first_same_value = elt;
|
1635 |
|
|
}
|
1636 |
|
|
else
|
1637 |
|
|
{
|
1638 |
|
|
/* Insert not at head of the class. */
|
1639 |
|
|
/* Put it after the last element cheaper than X. */
|
1640 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p, *next;
|
1641 |
|
|
|
1642 |
|
|
for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
|
1643 |
|
|
p = next);
|
1644 |
|
|
|
1645 |
|
|
/* Put it after P and before NEXT. */
|
1646 |
|
|
elt->next_same_value = next;
|
1647 |
|
|
if (next)
|
1648 |
|
|
next->prev_same_value = elt;
|
1649 |
|
|
|
1650 |
|
|
elt->prev_same_value = p;
|
1651 |
|
|
p->next_same_value = elt;
|
1652 |
|
|
elt->first_same_value = classp;
|
1653 |
|
|
}
|
1654 |
|
|
}
|
1655 |
|
|
else
|
1656 |
|
|
elt->first_same_value = elt;
|
1657 |
|
|
|
1658 |
|
|
/* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
|
1659 |
|
|
being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
|
1660 |
|
|
|
1661 |
|
|
If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
|
1662 |
|
|
and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register. So
|
1663 |
|
|
we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
|
1664 |
|
|
inserted).
|
1665 |
|
|
|
1666 |
|
|
If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
|
1667 |
|
|
constant, we must check the entire class.
|
1668 |
|
|
|
1669 |
|
|
If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
|
1670 |
|
|
update the qtys `const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
|
1671 |
|
|
insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant. */
|
1672 |
|
|
|
1673 |
|
|
if (elt->is_const && classp && REG_P (classp->exp)
|
1674 |
|
|
&& !REG_P (x))
|
1675 |
|
|
{
|
1676 |
|
|
int exp_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (classp->exp));
|
1677 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *exp_ent = &qty_table[exp_q];
|
1678 |
|
|
|
1679 |
|
|
exp_ent->const_rtx = gen_lowpart (exp_ent->mode, x);
|
1680 |
|
|
exp_ent->const_insn = this_insn;
|
1681 |
|
|
}
|
1682 |
|
|
|
1683 |
|
|
else if (REG_P (x)
|
1684 |
|
|
&& classp
|
1685 |
|
|
&& ! qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_rtx
|
1686 |
|
|
&& ! elt->is_const)
|
1687 |
|
|
{
|
1688 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p;
|
1689 |
|
|
|
1690 |
|
|
for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
|
1691 |
|
|
{
|
1692 |
|
|
if (p->is_const && !REG_P (p->exp))
|
1693 |
|
|
{
|
1694 |
|
|
int x_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
|
1695 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *x_ent = &qty_table[x_q];
|
1696 |
|
|
|
1697 |
|
|
x_ent->const_rtx
|
1698 |
|
|
= gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
|
1699 |
|
|
x_ent->const_insn = this_insn;
|
1700 |
|
|
break;
|
1701 |
|
|
}
|
1702 |
|
|
}
|
1703 |
|
|
}
|
1704 |
|
|
|
1705 |
|
|
else if (REG_P (x)
|
1706 |
|
|
&& qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_rtx
|
1707 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE (x) == qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].mode)
|
1708 |
|
|
qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_insn = this_insn;
|
1709 |
|
|
|
1710 |
|
|
/* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
|
1711 |
|
|
and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
|
1712 |
|
|
link it up with related expressions. */
|
1713 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
|
1714 |
|
|
{
|
1715 |
|
|
rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
|
1716 |
|
|
unsigned subhash;
|
1717 |
|
|
struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
|
1718 |
|
|
|
1719 |
|
|
if (subexp != 0)
|
1720 |
|
|
{
|
1721 |
|
|
/* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table. */
|
1722 |
|
|
subhash = SAFE_HASH (subexp, mode);
|
1723 |
|
|
subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
|
1724 |
|
|
if (subelt == 0)
|
1725 |
|
|
subelt = insert (subexp, NULL, subhash, mode);
|
1726 |
|
|
/* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none. */
|
1727 |
|
|
if (subelt->related_value == 0)
|
1728 |
|
|
subelt->related_value = subelt;
|
1729 |
|
|
/* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT. */
|
1730 |
|
|
subelt_prev = subelt;
|
1731 |
|
|
while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
|
1732 |
|
|
subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
|
1733 |
|
|
/* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
|
1734 |
|
|
This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one. */
|
1735 |
|
|
elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
|
1736 |
|
|
subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
|
1737 |
|
|
}
|
1738 |
|
|
}
|
1739 |
|
|
|
1740 |
|
|
return elt;
|
1741 |
|
|
}
|
1742 |
|
|
|
1743 |
|
|
/* Wrap insert_with_costs by passing the default costs. */
|
1744 |
|
|
|
1745 |
|
|
static struct table_elt *
|
1746 |
|
|
insert (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, unsigned int hash,
|
1747 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode)
|
1748 |
|
|
{
|
1749 |
|
|
return
|
1750 |
|
|
insert_with_costs (x, classp, hash, mode, COST (x), approx_reg_cost (x));
|
1751 |
|
|
}
|
1752 |
|
|
|
1753 |
|
|
|
1754 |
|
|
/* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
|
1755 |
|
|
CLASS2 into CLASS1. This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
|
1756 |
|
|
the two classes equivalent.
|
1757 |
|
|
|
1758 |
|
|
CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
|
1759 |
|
|
call.
|
1760 |
|
|
|
1761 |
|
|
Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied. */
|
1762 |
|
|
|
1763 |
|
|
static void
|
1764 |
|
|
merge_equiv_classes (struct table_elt *class1, struct table_elt *class2)
|
1765 |
|
|
{
|
1766 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new_elt;
|
1767 |
|
|
|
1768 |
|
|
/* Ensure we start with the head of the classes. */
|
1769 |
|
|
class1 = class1->first_same_value;
|
1770 |
|
|
class2 = class2->first_same_value;
|
1771 |
|
|
|
1772 |
|
|
/* If they were already equal, forget it. */
|
1773 |
|
|
if (class1 == class2)
|
1774 |
|
|
return;
|
1775 |
|
|
|
1776 |
|
|
for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
|
1777 |
|
|
{
|
1778 |
|
|
unsigned int hash;
|
1779 |
|
|
rtx exp = elt->exp;
|
1780 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
|
1781 |
|
|
|
1782 |
|
|
next = elt->next_same_value;
|
1783 |
|
|
|
1784 |
|
|
/* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
|
1785 |
|
|
Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
|
1786 |
|
|
hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
|
1787 |
|
|
if (REG_P (exp) || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, false))
|
1788 |
|
|
{
|
1789 |
|
|
bool need_rehash = false;
|
1790 |
|
|
|
1791 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
|
1792 |
|
|
hash = HASH (exp, mode);
|
1793 |
|
|
|
1794 |
|
|
if (REG_P (exp))
|
1795 |
|
|
{
|
1796 |
|
|
need_rehash = REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (exp));
|
1797 |
|
|
delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
|
1798 |
|
|
}
|
1799 |
|
|
|
1800 |
|
|
if (REG_P (exp) && REGNO (exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
1801 |
|
|
remove_pseudo_from_table (exp, hash);
|
1802 |
|
|
else
|
1803 |
|
|
remove_from_table (elt, hash);
|
1804 |
|
|
|
1805 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0) || need_rehash)
|
1806 |
|
|
{
|
1807 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (exp);
|
1808 |
|
|
hash = HASH (exp, mode);
|
1809 |
|
|
}
|
1810 |
|
|
new_elt = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
|
1811 |
|
|
new_elt->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
|
1812 |
|
|
}
|
1813 |
|
|
}
|
1814 |
|
|
}
|
1815 |
|
|
|
1816 |
|
|
/* Flush the entire hash table. */
|
1817 |
|
|
|
1818 |
|
|
static void
|
1819 |
|
|
flush_hash_table (void)
|
1820 |
|
|
{
|
1821 |
|
|
int i;
|
1822 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p;
|
1823 |
|
|
|
1824 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
|
1825 |
|
|
for (p = table[i]; p; p = table[i])
|
1826 |
|
|
{
|
1827 |
|
|
/* Note that invalidate can remove elements
|
1828 |
|
|
after P in the current hash chain. */
|
1829 |
|
|
if (REG_P (p->exp))
|
1830 |
|
|
invalidate (p->exp, VOIDmode);
|
1831 |
|
|
else
|
1832 |
|
|
remove_from_table (p, i);
|
1833 |
|
|
}
|
1834 |
|
|
}
|
1835 |
|
|
|
1836 |
|
|
/* Function called for each rtx to check whether true dependence exist. */
|
1837 |
|
|
struct check_dependence_data
|
1838 |
|
|
{
|
1839 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode;
|
1840 |
|
|
rtx exp;
|
1841 |
|
|
rtx addr;
|
1842 |
|
|
};
|
1843 |
|
|
|
1844 |
|
|
static int
|
1845 |
|
|
check_dependence (rtx *x, void *data)
|
1846 |
|
|
{
|
1847 |
|
|
struct check_dependence_data *d = (struct check_dependence_data *) data;
|
1848 |
|
|
if (*x && MEM_P (*x))
|
1849 |
|
|
return canon_true_dependence (d->exp, d->mode, d->addr, *x, NULL_RTX,
|
1850 |
|
|
cse_rtx_varies_p);
|
1851 |
|
|
else
|
1852 |
|
|
return 0;
|
1853 |
|
|
}
|
1854 |
|
|
|
1855 |
|
|
/* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid, all expressions whose
|
1856 |
|
|
values could be altered by storing in X. X is a register, a subreg, or
|
1857 |
|
|
a memory reference with nonvarying address (because, when a memory
|
1858 |
|
|
reference with a varying address is stored in, all memory references are
|
1859 |
|
|
removed by invalidate_memory so specific invalidation is superfluous).
|
1860 |
|
|
FULL_MODE, if not VOIDmode, indicates that this much should be
|
1861 |
|
|
invalidated instead of just the amount indicated by the mode of X. This
|
1862 |
|
|
is only used for bitfield stores into memory.
|
1863 |
|
|
|
1864 |
|
|
A nonvarying address may be just a register or just a symbol reference,
|
1865 |
|
|
or it may be either of those plus a numeric offset. */
|
1866 |
|
|
|
1867 |
|
|
static void
|
1868 |
|
|
invalidate (rtx x, enum machine_mode full_mode)
|
1869 |
|
|
{
|
1870 |
|
|
int i;
|
1871 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p;
|
1872 |
|
|
rtx addr;
|
1873 |
|
|
|
1874 |
|
|
switch (GET_CODE (x))
|
1875 |
|
|
{
|
1876 |
|
|
case REG:
|
1877 |
|
|
{
|
1878 |
|
|
/* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents are recorded
|
1879 |
|
|
through the qty number mechanism. Just change the qty number of
|
1880 |
|
|
the register, mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
|
1881 |
|
|
and remove it itself. */
|
1882 |
|
|
unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
|
1883 |
|
|
unsigned int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
|
1884 |
|
|
|
1885 |
|
|
/* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
|
1886 |
|
|
that its value might have changed. If it is a pseudo, remove its
|
1887 |
|
|
entry from the hash table.
|
1888 |
|
|
|
1889 |
|
|
For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
|
1890 |
|
|
additional hard registers corresponding to X. Then, if any of these
|
1891 |
|
|
registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
|
1892 |
|
|
overlap these registers. */
|
1893 |
|
|
|
1894 |
|
|
delete_reg_equiv (regno);
|
1895 |
|
|
REG_TICK (regno)++;
|
1896 |
|
|
SUBREG_TICKED (regno) = -1;
|
1897 |
|
|
|
1898 |
|
|
if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
1899 |
|
|
remove_pseudo_from_table (x, hash);
|
1900 |
|
|
else
|
1901 |
|
|
{
|
1902 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT in_table
|
1903 |
|
|
= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
|
1904 |
|
|
unsigned int endregno = END_HARD_REGNO (x);
|
1905 |
|
|
unsigned int tregno, tendregno, rn;
|
1906 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p, *next;
|
1907 |
|
|
|
1908 |
|
|
CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
|
1909 |
|
|
|
1910 |
|
|
for (rn = regno + 1; rn < endregno; rn++)
|
1911 |
|
|
{
|
1912 |
|
|
in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, rn);
|
1913 |
|
|
CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, rn);
|
1914 |
|
|
delete_reg_equiv (rn);
|
1915 |
|
|
REG_TICK (rn)++;
|
1916 |
|
|
SUBREG_TICKED (rn) = -1;
|
1917 |
|
|
}
|
1918 |
|
|
|
1919 |
|
|
if (in_table)
|
1920 |
|
|
for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
|
1921 |
|
|
for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
|
1922 |
|
|
{
|
1923 |
|
|
next = p->next_same_hash;
|
1924 |
|
|
|
1925 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (p->exp)
|
1926 |
|
|
|| REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
1927 |
|
|
continue;
|
1928 |
|
|
|
1929 |
|
|
tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
|
1930 |
|
|
tendregno = END_HARD_REGNO (p->exp);
|
1931 |
|
|
if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
|
1932 |
|
|
remove_from_table (p, hash);
|
1933 |
|
|
}
|
1934 |
|
|
}
|
1935 |
|
|
}
|
1936 |
|
|
return;
|
1937 |
|
|
|
1938 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
1939 |
|
|
invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x), VOIDmode);
|
1940 |
|
|
return;
|
1941 |
|
|
|
1942 |
|
|
case PARALLEL:
|
1943 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; --i)
|
1944 |
|
|
invalidate (XVECEXP (x, 0, i), VOIDmode);
|
1945 |
|
|
return;
|
1946 |
|
|
|
1947 |
|
|
case EXPR_LIST:
|
1948 |
|
|
/* This is part of a disjoint return value; extract the location in
|
1949 |
|
|
question ignoring the offset. */
|
1950 |
|
|
invalidate (XEXP (x, 0), VOIDmode);
|
1951 |
|
|
return;
|
1952 |
|
|
|
1953 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
1954 |
|
|
addr = canon_rtx (get_addr (XEXP (x, 0)));
|
1955 |
|
|
/* Calculate the canonical version of X here so that
|
1956 |
|
|
true_dependence doesn't generate new RTL for X on each call. */
|
1957 |
|
|
x = canon_rtx (x);
|
1958 |
|
|
|
1959 |
|
|
/* Remove all hash table elements that refer to overlapping pieces of
|
1960 |
|
|
memory. */
|
1961 |
|
|
if (full_mode == VOIDmode)
|
1962 |
|
|
full_mode = GET_MODE (x);
|
1963 |
|
|
|
1964 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
|
1965 |
|
|
{
|
1966 |
|
|
struct table_elt *next;
|
1967 |
|
|
|
1968 |
|
|
for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
|
1969 |
|
|
{
|
1970 |
|
|
next = p->next_same_hash;
|
1971 |
|
|
if (p->in_memory)
|
1972 |
|
|
{
|
1973 |
|
|
struct check_dependence_data d;
|
1974 |
|
|
|
1975 |
|
|
/* Just canonicalize the expression once;
|
1976 |
|
|
otherwise each time we call invalidate
|
1977 |
|
|
true_dependence will canonicalize the
|
1978 |
|
|
expression again. */
|
1979 |
|
|
if (!p->canon_exp)
|
1980 |
|
|
p->canon_exp = canon_rtx (p->exp);
|
1981 |
|
|
d.exp = x;
|
1982 |
|
|
d.addr = addr;
|
1983 |
|
|
d.mode = full_mode;
|
1984 |
|
|
if (for_each_rtx (&p->canon_exp, check_dependence, &d))
|
1985 |
|
|
remove_from_table (p, i);
|
1986 |
|
|
}
|
1987 |
|
|
}
|
1988 |
|
|
}
|
1989 |
|
|
return;
|
1990 |
|
|
|
1991 |
|
|
default:
|
1992 |
|
|
gcc_unreachable ();
|
1993 |
|
|
}
|
1994 |
|
|
}
|
1995 |
|
|
|
1996 |
|
|
/* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
|
1997 |
|
|
since they are already invalid, and we are about to
|
1998 |
|
|
mark that register valid again and don't want the old
|
1999 |
|
|
expressions to reappear as valid. */
|
2000 |
|
|
|
2001 |
|
|
static void
|
2002 |
|
|
remove_invalid_refs (unsigned int regno)
|
2003 |
|
|
{
|
2004 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
2005 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p, *next;
|
2006 |
|
|
|
2007 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
|
2008 |
|
|
for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
|
2009 |
|
|
{
|
2010 |
|
|
next = p->next_same_hash;
|
2011 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (p->exp)
|
2012 |
|
|
&& refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, (rtx *) 0))
|
2013 |
|
|
remove_from_table (p, i);
|
2014 |
|
|
}
|
2015 |
|
|
}
|
2016 |
|
|
|
2017 |
|
|
/* Likewise for a subreg with subreg_reg REGNO, subreg_byte OFFSET,
|
2018 |
|
|
and mode MODE. */
|
2019 |
|
|
static void
|
2020 |
|
|
remove_invalid_subreg_refs (unsigned int regno, unsigned int offset,
|
2021 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode)
|
2022 |
|
|
{
|
2023 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
2024 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p, *next;
|
2025 |
|
|
unsigned int end = offset + (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) - 1);
|
2026 |
|
|
|
2027 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
|
2028 |
|
|
for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
|
2029 |
|
|
{
|
2030 |
|
|
rtx exp = p->exp;
|
2031 |
|
|
next = p->next_same_hash;
|
2032 |
|
|
|
2033 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (exp)
|
2034 |
|
|
&& (GET_CODE (exp) != SUBREG
|
2035 |
|
|
|| !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (exp))
|
2036 |
|
|
|| REGNO (SUBREG_REG (exp)) != regno
|
2037 |
|
|
|| (((SUBREG_BYTE (exp)
|
2038 |
|
|
+ (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (exp)) - 1)) >= offset)
|
2039 |
|
|
&& SUBREG_BYTE (exp) <= end))
|
2040 |
|
|
&& refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, (rtx *) 0))
|
2041 |
|
|
remove_from_table (p, i);
|
2042 |
|
|
}
|
2043 |
|
|
}
|
2044 |
|
|
|
2045 |
|
|
/* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
|
2046 |
|
|
reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
|
2047 |
|
|
|
2048 |
|
|
This is called when we make a jump equivalence. */
|
2049 |
|
|
|
2050 |
|
|
static void
|
2051 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (rtx x)
|
2052 |
|
|
{
|
2053 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
2054 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p, *next;
|
2055 |
|
|
unsigned hash;
|
2056 |
|
|
|
2057 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
|
2058 |
|
|
x = SUBREG_REG (x);
|
2059 |
|
|
|
2060 |
|
|
/* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
|
2061 |
|
|
valid entries in the table, we have no work to do. */
|
2062 |
|
|
|
2063 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (x)
|
2064 |
|
|
|| REG_IN_TABLE (REGNO (x)) < 0
|
2065 |
|
|
|| REG_IN_TABLE (REGNO (x)) != REG_TICK (REGNO (x)))
|
2066 |
|
|
return;
|
2067 |
|
|
|
2068 |
|
|
/* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
|
2069 |
|
|
If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it. */
|
2070 |
|
|
|
2071 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
|
2072 |
|
|
for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
|
2073 |
|
|
{
|
2074 |
|
|
next = p->next_same_hash;
|
2075 |
|
|
if (reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
|
2076 |
|
|
&& exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false)
|
2077 |
|
|
&& i != (hash = SAFE_HASH (p->exp, p->mode)))
|
2078 |
|
|
{
|
2079 |
|
|
if (p->next_same_hash)
|
2080 |
|
|
p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
|
2081 |
|
|
|
2082 |
|
|
if (p->prev_same_hash)
|
2083 |
|
|
p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
|
2084 |
|
|
else
|
2085 |
|
|
table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
|
2086 |
|
|
|
2087 |
|
|
p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
|
2088 |
|
|
p->prev_same_hash = 0;
|
2089 |
|
|
if (table[hash])
|
2090 |
|
|
table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
|
2091 |
|
|
table[hash] = p;
|
2092 |
|
|
}
|
2093 |
|
|
}
|
2094 |
|
|
}
|
2095 |
|
|
|
2096 |
|
|
/* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
|
2097 |
|
|
register. Also update their TICK values. */
|
2098 |
|
|
|
2099 |
|
|
static void
|
2100 |
|
|
invalidate_for_call (void)
|
2101 |
|
|
{
|
2102 |
|
|
unsigned int regno, endregno;
|
2103 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
2104 |
|
|
unsigned hash;
|
2105 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p, *next;
|
2106 |
|
|
int in_table = 0;
|
2107 |
|
|
|
2108 |
|
|
/* Go through all the hard registers. For each that is clobbered in
|
2109 |
|
|
a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
|
2110 |
|
|
reg_tick if defined. Also see if any of these registers is currently
|
2111 |
|
|
in the table. */
|
2112 |
|
|
|
2113 |
|
|
for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
|
2114 |
|
|
if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
|
2115 |
|
|
{
|
2116 |
|
|
delete_reg_equiv (regno);
|
2117 |
|
|
if (REG_TICK (regno) >= 0)
|
2118 |
|
|
{
|
2119 |
|
|
REG_TICK (regno)++;
|
2120 |
|
|
SUBREG_TICKED (regno) = -1;
|
2121 |
|
|
}
|
2122 |
|
|
|
2123 |
|
|
in_table |= (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno) != 0);
|
2124 |
|
|
}
|
2125 |
|
|
|
2126 |
|
|
/* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
|
2127 |
|
|
table, we are done. Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
|
2128 |
|
|
entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register. */
|
2129 |
|
|
|
2130 |
|
|
if (in_table)
|
2131 |
|
|
for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
|
2132 |
|
|
for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
|
2133 |
|
|
{
|
2134 |
|
|
next = p->next_same_hash;
|
2135 |
|
|
|
2136 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (p->exp)
|
2137 |
|
|
|| REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
2138 |
|
|
continue;
|
2139 |
|
|
|
2140 |
|
|
regno = REGNO (p->exp);
|
2141 |
|
|
endregno = END_HARD_REGNO (p->exp);
|
2142 |
|
|
|
2143 |
|
|
for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
|
2144 |
|
|
if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
|
2145 |
|
|
{
|
2146 |
|
|
remove_from_table (p, hash);
|
2147 |
|
|
break;
|
2148 |
|
|
}
|
2149 |
|
|
}
|
2150 |
|
|
}
|
2151 |
|
|
|
2152 |
|
|
/* Given an expression X of type CONST,
|
2153 |
|
|
and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
|
2154 |
|
|
is not in the hash table),
|
2155 |
|
|
return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
|
2156 |
|
|
If none can be found, return 0. */
|
2157 |
|
|
|
2158 |
|
|
static rtx
|
2159 |
|
|
use_related_value (rtx x, struct table_elt *elt)
|
2160 |
|
|
{
|
2161 |
|
|
struct table_elt *relt = 0;
|
2162 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p, *q;
|
2163 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
|
2164 |
|
|
|
2165 |
|
|
/* First, is there anything related known?
|
2166 |
|
|
If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
|
2167 |
|
|
Otherwise, must look it up. */
|
2168 |
|
|
|
2169 |
|
|
if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
|
2170 |
|
|
relt = elt;
|
2171 |
|
|
else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
|
2172 |
|
|
{
|
2173 |
|
|
rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
|
2174 |
|
|
if (subexp != 0)
|
2175 |
|
|
relt = lookup (subexp,
|
2176 |
|
|
SAFE_HASH (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)),
|
2177 |
|
|
GET_MODE (subexp));
|
2178 |
|
|
}
|
2179 |
|
|
|
2180 |
|
|
if (relt == 0)
|
2181 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2182 |
|
|
|
2183 |
|
|
/* Search all related table entries for one that has an
|
2184 |
|
|
equivalent register. */
|
2185 |
|
|
|
2186 |
|
|
p = relt;
|
2187 |
|
|
while (1)
|
2188 |
|
|
{
|
2189 |
|
|
/* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
|
2190 |
|
|
The first is when X is already in the table. Then it is searching
|
2191 |
|
|
the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT). The second case is when
|
2192 |
|
|
X is not in the table. Then RELT points to a class for the related
|
2193 |
|
|
value.
|
2194 |
|
|
|
2195 |
|
|
Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
|
2196 |
|
|
the same value as X. */
|
2197 |
|
|
|
2198 |
|
|
if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
|
2199 |
|
|
q = 0;
|
2200 |
|
|
else
|
2201 |
|
|
for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
|
2202 |
|
|
if (REG_P (q->exp))
|
2203 |
|
|
break;
|
2204 |
|
|
|
2205 |
|
|
if (q)
|
2206 |
|
|
break;
|
2207 |
|
|
|
2208 |
|
|
p = p->related_value;
|
2209 |
|
|
|
2210 |
|
|
/* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
|
2211 |
|
|
Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
|
2212 |
|
|
and it has no related values recorded. */
|
2213 |
|
|
if (p == relt || p == 0)
|
2214 |
|
|
break;
|
2215 |
|
|
}
|
2216 |
|
|
|
2217 |
|
|
if (q == 0)
|
2218 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2219 |
|
|
|
2220 |
|
|
offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
|
2221 |
|
|
/* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity. */
|
2222 |
|
|
return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
|
2223 |
|
|
}
|
2224 |
|
|
|
2225 |
|
|
|
2226 |
|
|
/* Hash a string. Just add its bytes up. */
|
2227 |
|
|
static inline unsigned
|
2228 |
|
|
hash_rtx_string (const char *ps)
|
2229 |
|
|
{
|
2230 |
|
|
unsigned hash = 0;
|
2231 |
|
|
const unsigned char *p = (const unsigned char *) ps;
|
2232 |
|
|
|
2233 |
|
|
if (p)
|
2234 |
|
|
while (*p)
|
2235 |
|
|
hash += *p++;
|
2236 |
|
|
|
2237 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2238 |
|
|
}
|
2239 |
|
|
|
2240 |
|
|
/* Same as hash_rtx, but call CB on each rtx if it is not NULL.
|
2241 |
|
|
When the callback returns true, we continue with the new rtx. */
|
2242 |
|
|
|
2243 |
|
|
unsigned
|
2244 |
|
|
hash_rtx_cb (const_rtx x, enum machine_mode mode,
|
2245 |
|
|
int *do_not_record_p, int *hash_arg_in_memory_p,
|
2246 |
|
|
bool have_reg_qty, hash_rtx_callback_function cb)
|
2247 |
|
|
{
|
2248 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
2249 |
|
|
unsigned hash = 0;
|
2250 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
2251 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
2252 |
|
|
enum machine_mode newmode;
|
2253 |
|
|
rtx newx;
|
2254 |
|
|
|
2255 |
|
|
/* Used to turn recursion into iteration. We can't rely on GCC's
|
2256 |
|
|
tail-recursion elimination since we need to keep accumulating values
|
2257 |
|
|
in HASH. */
|
2258 |
|
|
repeat:
|
2259 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
2260 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2261 |
|
|
|
2262 |
|
|
/* Invoke the callback first. */
|
2263 |
|
|
if (cb != NULL
|
2264 |
|
|
&& ((*cb) (x, mode, &newx, &newmode)))
|
2265 |
|
|
{
|
2266 |
|
|
hash += hash_rtx_cb (newx, newmode, do_not_record_p,
|
2267 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory_p, have_reg_qty, cb);
|
2268 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2269 |
|
|
}
|
2270 |
|
|
|
2271 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
2272 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
2273 |
|
|
{
|
2274 |
|
|
case REG:
|
2275 |
|
|
{
|
2276 |
|
|
unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
|
2277 |
|
|
|
2278 |
|
|
if (do_not_record_p && !reload_completed)
|
2279 |
|
|
{
|
2280 |
|
|
/* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
|
2281 |
|
|
because extending its life will cause reload problems. We
|
2282 |
|
|
consider ap, fp, sp, gp to be fixed for this purpose.
|
2283 |
|
|
|
2284 |
|
|
We also consider CCmode registers to be fixed for this purpose;
|
2285 |
|
|
failure to do so leads to failure to simplify 0<100 type of
|
2286 |
|
|
conditionals.
|
2287 |
|
|
|
2288 |
|
|
On all machines, we can't record any global registers.
|
2289 |
|
|
Nor should we record any register that is in a small
|
2290 |
|
|
class, as defined by CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P. */
|
2291 |
|
|
bool record;
|
2292 |
|
|
|
2293 |
|
|
if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
2294 |
|
|
record = true;
|
2295 |
|
|
else if (x == frame_pointer_rtx
|
2296 |
|
|
|| x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
|
2297 |
|
|
|| x == arg_pointer_rtx
|
2298 |
|
|
|| x == stack_pointer_rtx
|
2299 |
|
|
|| x == pic_offset_table_rtx)
|
2300 |
|
|
record = true;
|
2301 |
|
|
else if (global_regs[regno])
|
2302 |
|
|
record = false;
|
2303 |
|
|
else if (fixed_regs[regno])
|
2304 |
|
|
record = true;
|
2305 |
|
|
else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_CC)
|
2306 |
|
|
record = true;
|
2307 |
|
|
else if (SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES)
|
2308 |
|
|
record = false;
|
2309 |
|
|
else if (CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno)))
|
2310 |
|
|
record = false;
|
2311 |
|
|
else
|
2312 |
|
|
record = true;
|
2313 |
|
|
|
2314 |
|
|
if (!record)
|
2315 |
|
|
{
|
2316 |
|
|
*do_not_record_p = 1;
|
2317 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2318 |
|
|
}
|
2319 |
|
|
}
|
2320 |
|
|
|
2321 |
|
|
hash += ((unsigned int) REG << 7);
|
2322 |
|
|
hash += (have_reg_qty ? (unsigned) REG_QTY (regno) : regno);
|
2323 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2324 |
|
|
}
|
2325 |
|
|
|
2326 |
|
|
/* We handle SUBREG of a REG specially because the underlying
|
2327 |
|
|
reg changes its hash value with every value change; we don't
|
2328 |
|
|
want to have to forget unrelated subregs when one subreg changes. */
|
2329 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
2330 |
|
|
{
|
2331 |
|
|
if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
|
2332 |
|
|
{
|
2333 |
|
|
hash += (((unsigned int) SUBREG << 7)
|
2334 |
|
|
+ REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))
|
2335 |
|
|
+ (SUBREG_BYTE (x) / UNITS_PER_WORD));
|
2336 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2337 |
|
|
}
|
2338 |
|
|
break;
|
2339 |
|
|
}
|
2340 |
|
|
|
2341 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
2342 |
|
|
hash += (((unsigned int) CONST_INT << 7) + (unsigned int) mode
|
2343 |
|
|
+ (unsigned int) INTVAL (x));
|
2344 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2345 |
|
|
|
2346 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
2347 |
|
|
/* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
|
2348 |
|
|
the integers representing the constant. */
|
2349 |
|
|
hash += (unsigned int) code + (unsigned int) GET_MODE (x);
|
2350 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode)
|
2351 |
|
|
hash += real_hash (CONST_DOUBLE_REAL_VALUE (x));
|
2352 |
|
|
else
|
2353 |
|
|
hash += ((unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x)
|
2354 |
|
|
+ (unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x));
|
2355 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2356 |
|
|
|
2357 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
2358 |
|
|
hash += (unsigned int) code + (unsigned int) GET_MODE (x);
|
2359 |
|
|
hash += fixed_hash (CONST_FIXED_VALUE (x));
|
2360 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2361 |
|
|
|
2362 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
2363 |
|
|
{
|
2364 |
|
|
int units;
|
2365 |
|
|
rtx elt;
|
2366 |
|
|
|
2367 |
|
|
units = CONST_VECTOR_NUNITS (x);
|
2368 |
|
|
|
2369 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < units; ++i)
|
2370 |
|
|
{
|
2371 |
|
|
elt = CONST_VECTOR_ELT (x, i);
|
2372 |
|
|
hash += hash_rtx_cb (elt, GET_MODE (elt),
|
2373 |
|
|
do_not_record_p, hash_arg_in_memory_p,
|
2374 |
|
|
have_reg_qty, cb);
|
2375 |
|
|
}
|
2376 |
|
|
|
2377 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2378 |
|
|
}
|
2379 |
|
|
|
2380 |
|
|
/* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label. */
|
2381 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
2382 |
|
|
/* We don't hash on the address of the CODE_LABEL to avoid bootstrap
|
2383 |
|
|
differences and differences between each stage's debugging dumps. */
|
2384 |
|
|
hash += (((unsigned int) LABEL_REF << 7)
|
2385 |
|
|
+ CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (x, 0)));
|
2386 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2387 |
|
|
|
2388 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
2389 |
|
|
{
|
2390 |
|
|
/* Don't hash on the symbol's address to avoid bootstrap differences.
|
2391 |
|
|
Different hash values may cause expressions to be recorded in
|
2392 |
|
|
different orders and thus different registers to be used in the
|
2393 |
|
|
final assembler. This also avoids differences in the dump files
|
2394 |
|
|
between various stages. */
|
2395 |
|
|
unsigned int h = 0;
|
2396 |
|
|
const unsigned char *p = (const unsigned char *) XSTR (x, 0);
|
2397 |
|
|
|
2398 |
|
|
while (*p)
|
2399 |
|
|
h += (h << 7) + *p++; /* ??? revisit */
|
2400 |
|
|
|
2401 |
|
|
hash += ((unsigned int) SYMBOL_REF << 7) + h;
|
2402 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2403 |
|
|
}
|
2404 |
|
|
|
2405 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
2406 |
|
|
/* We don't record if marked volatile or if BLKmode since we don't
|
2407 |
|
|
know the size of the move. */
|
2408 |
|
|
if (do_not_record_p && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || GET_MODE (x) == BLKmode))
|
2409 |
|
|
{
|
2410 |
|
|
*do_not_record_p = 1;
|
2411 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2412 |
|
|
}
|
2413 |
|
|
if (hash_arg_in_memory_p && !MEM_READONLY_P (x))
|
2414 |
|
|
*hash_arg_in_memory_p = 1;
|
2415 |
|
|
|
2416 |
|
|
/* Now that we have already found this special case,
|
2417 |
|
|
might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
|
2418 |
|
|
hash += (unsigned) MEM;
|
2419 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, 0);
|
2420 |
|
|
goto repeat;
|
2421 |
|
|
|
2422 |
|
|
case USE:
|
2423 |
|
|
/* A USE that mentions non-volatile memory needs special
|
2424 |
|
|
handling since the MEM may be BLKmode which normally
|
2425 |
|
|
prevents an entry from being made. Pure calls are
|
2426 |
|
|
marked by a USE which mentions BLKmode memory.
|
2427 |
|
|
See calls.c:emit_call_1. */
|
2428 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0))
|
2429 |
|
|
&& ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
|
2430 |
|
|
{
|
2431 |
|
|
hash += (unsigned) USE;
|
2432 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, 0);
|
2433 |
|
|
|
2434 |
|
|
if (hash_arg_in_memory_p && !MEM_READONLY_P (x))
|
2435 |
|
|
*hash_arg_in_memory_p = 1;
|
2436 |
|
|
|
2437 |
|
|
/* Now that we have already found this special case,
|
2438 |
|
|
might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
|
2439 |
|
|
hash += (unsigned) MEM;
|
2440 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, 0);
|
2441 |
|
|
goto repeat;
|
2442 |
|
|
}
|
2443 |
|
|
break;
|
2444 |
|
|
|
2445 |
|
|
case PRE_DEC:
|
2446 |
|
|
case PRE_INC:
|
2447 |
|
|
case POST_DEC:
|
2448 |
|
|
case POST_INC:
|
2449 |
|
|
case PRE_MODIFY:
|
2450 |
|
|
case POST_MODIFY:
|
2451 |
|
|
case PC:
|
2452 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
2453 |
|
|
case CALL:
|
2454 |
|
|
case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
|
2455 |
|
|
if (do_not_record_p) {
|
2456 |
|
|
*do_not_record_p = 1;
|
2457 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2458 |
|
|
}
|
2459 |
|
|
else
|
2460 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2461 |
|
|
break;
|
2462 |
|
|
|
2463 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
2464 |
|
|
if (do_not_record_p && MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
|
2465 |
|
|
{
|
2466 |
|
|
*do_not_record_p = 1;
|
2467 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2468 |
|
|
}
|
2469 |
|
|
else
|
2470 |
|
|
{
|
2471 |
|
|
/* We don't want to take the filename and line into account. */
|
2472 |
|
|
hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x)
|
2473 |
|
|
+ hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (x))
|
2474 |
|
|
+ hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (x))
|
2475 |
|
|
+ (unsigned) ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (x);
|
2476 |
|
|
|
2477 |
|
|
if (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x))
|
2478 |
|
|
{
|
2479 |
|
|
for (i = 1; i < ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x); i++)
|
2480 |
|
|
{
|
2481 |
|
|
hash += (hash_rtx_cb (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
|
2482 |
|
|
GET_MODE (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i)),
|
2483 |
|
|
do_not_record_p, hash_arg_in_memory_p,
|
2484 |
|
|
have_reg_qty, cb)
|
2485 |
|
|
+ hash_rtx_string
|
2486 |
|
|
(ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, i)));
|
2487 |
|
|
}
|
2488 |
|
|
|
2489 |
|
|
hash += hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, 0));
|
2490 |
|
|
x = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, 0);
|
2491 |
|
|
mode = GET_MODE (x);
|
2492 |
|
|
goto repeat;
|
2493 |
|
|
}
|
2494 |
|
|
|
2495 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2496 |
|
|
}
|
2497 |
|
|
break;
|
2498 |
|
|
|
2499 |
|
|
default:
|
2500 |
|
|
break;
|
2501 |
|
|
}
|
2502 |
|
|
|
2503 |
|
|
i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
|
2504 |
|
|
hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x);
|
2505 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
2506 |
|
|
for (; i >= 0; i--)
|
2507 |
|
|
{
|
2508 |
|
|
switch (fmt[i])
|
2509 |
|
|
{
|
2510 |
|
|
case 'e':
|
2511 |
|
|
/* If we are about to do the last recursive call
|
2512 |
|
|
needed at this level, change it into iteration.
|
2513 |
|
|
This function is called enough to be worth it. */
|
2514 |
|
|
if (i == 0)
|
2515 |
|
|
{
|
2516 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, i);
|
2517 |
|
|
goto repeat;
|
2518 |
|
|
}
|
2519 |
|
|
|
2520 |
|
|
hash += hash_rtx_cb (XEXP (x, i), VOIDmode, do_not_record_p,
|
2521 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory_p,
|
2522 |
|
|
have_reg_qty, cb);
|
2523 |
|
|
break;
|
2524 |
|
|
|
2525 |
|
|
case 'E':
|
2526 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
2527 |
|
|
hash += hash_rtx_cb (XVECEXP (x, i, j), VOIDmode, do_not_record_p,
|
2528 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory_p,
|
2529 |
|
|
have_reg_qty, cb);
|
2530 |
|
|
break;
|
2531 |
|
|
|
2532 |
|
|
case 's':
|
2533 |
|
|
hash += hash_rtx_string (XSTR (x, i));
|
2534 |
|
|
break;
|
2535 |
|
|
|
2536 |
|
|
case 'i':
|
2537 |
|
|
hash += (unsigned int) XINT (x, i);
|
2538 |
|
|
break;
|
2539 |
|
|
|
2540 |
|
|
case '0': case 't':
|
2541 |
|
|
/* Unused. */
|
2542 |
|
|
break;
|
2543 |
|
|
|
2544 |
|
|
default:
|
2545 |
|
|
gcc_unreachable ();
|
2546 |
|
|
}
|
2547 |
|
|
}
|
2548 |
|
|
|
2549 |
|
|
return hash;
|
2550 |
|
|
}
|
2551 |
|
|
|
2552 |
|
|
/* Hash an rtx. We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
|
2553 |
|
|
Equivalent registers hash identically.
|
2554 |
|
|
MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
|
2555 |
|
|
otherwise the mode of X is used.
|
2556 |
|
|
|
2557 |
|
|
Store 1 in DO_NOT_RECORD_P if any subexpression is volatile.
|
2558 |
|
|
|
2559 |
|
|
If HASH_ARG_IN_MEMORY_P is not NULL, store 1 in it if X contains
|
2560 |
|
|
a MEM rtx which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
|
2561 |
|
|
|
2562 |
|
|
Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
|
2563 |
|
|
is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address. */
|
2564 |
|
|
|
2565 |
|
|
unsigned
|
2566 |
|
|
hash_rtx (const_rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, int *do_not_record_p,
|
2567 |
|
|
int *hash_arg_in_memory_p, bool have_reg_qty)
|
2568 |
|
|
{
|
2569 |
|
|
return hash_rtx_cb (x, mode, do_not_record_p,
|
2570 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory_p, have_reg_qty, NULL);
|
2571 |
|
|
}
|
2572 |
|
|
|
2573 |
|
|
/* Hash an rtx X for cse via hash_rtx.
|
2574 |
|
|
Stores 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
|
2575 |
|
|
Stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a mem rtx which
|
2576 |
|
|
does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set. */
|
2577 |
|
|
|
2578 |
|
|
static inline unsigned
|
2579 |
|
|
canon_hash (rtx x, enum machine_mode mode)
|
2580 |
|
|
{
|
2581 |
|
|
return hash_rtx (x, mode, &do_not_record, &hash_arg_in_memory, true);
|
2582 |
|
|
}
|
2583 |
|
|
|
2584 |
|
|
/* Like canon_hash but with no side effects, i.e. do_not_record
|
2585 |
|
|
and hash_arg_in_memory are not changed. */
|
2586 |
|
|
|
2587 |
|
|
static inline unsigned
|
2588 |
|
|
safe_hash (rtx x, enum machine_mode mode)
|
2589 |
|
|
{
|
2590 |
|
|
int dummy_do_not_record;
|
2591 |
|
|
return hash_rtx (x, mode, &dummy_do_not_record, NULL, true);
|
2592 |
|
|
}
|
2593 |
|
|
|
2594 |
|
|
/* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
|
2595 |
|
|
without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
|
2596 |
|
|
If VALIDATE is nonzero,
|
2597 |
|
|
we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
|
2598 |
|
|
and Y was found in the hash table. We check register refs
|
2599 |
|
|
in Y for being marked as valid.
|
2600 |
|
|
|
2601 |
|
|
If FOR_GCSE is true, we compare X and Y for equivalence for GCSE. */
|
2602 |
|
|
|
2603 |
|
|
int
|
2604 |
|
|
exp_equiv_p (const_rtx x, const_rtx y, int validate, bool for_gcse)
|
2605 |
|
|
{
|
2606 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
2607 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
2608 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
2609 |
|
|
|
2610 |
|
|
/* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
|
2611 |
|
|
if VALIDATE is nonzero. */
|
2612 |
|
|
if (x == y && !validate)
|
2613 |
|
|
return 1;
|
2614 |
|
|
|
2615 |
|
|
if (x == 0 || y == 0)
|
2616 |
|
|
return x == y;
|
2617 |
|
|
|
2618 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
2619 |
|
|
if (code != GET_CODE (y))
|
2620 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2621 |
|
|
|
2622 |
|
|
/* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent. */
|
2623 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
|
2624 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2625 |
|
|
|
2626 |
|
|
/* MEMs refering to different address space are not equivalent. */
|
2627 |
|
|
if (code == MEM && MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x) != MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y))
|
2628 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2629 |
|
|
|
2630 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
2631 |
|
|
{
|
2632 |
|
|
case PC:
|
2633 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
2634 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
2635 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
2636 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
2637 |
|
|
return x == y;
|
2638 |
|
|
|
2639 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
2640 |
|
|
return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
|
2641 |
|
|
|
2642 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
2643 |
|
|
return XSTR (x, 0) == XSTR (y, 0);
|
2644 |
|
|
|
2645 |
|
|
case REG:
|
2646 |
|
|
if (for_gcse)
|
2647 |
|
|
return REGNO (x) == REGNO (y);
|
2648 |
|
|
else
|
2649 |
|
|
{
|
2650 |
|
|
unsigned int regno = REGNO (y);
|
2651 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
2652 |
|
|
unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (y);
|
2653 |
|
|
|
2654 |
|
|
/* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
|
2655 |
|
|
equivalent. If there are and we are not to validate, they
|
2656 |
|
|
are equivalent. Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date. */
|
2657 |
|
|
|
2658 |
|
|
if (REG_QTY (REGNO (x)) != REG_QTY (regno))
|
2659 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2660 |
|
|
|
2661 |
|
|
if (! validate)
|
2662 |
|
|
return 1;
|
2663 |
|
|
|
2664 |
|
|
for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
|
2665 |
|
|
if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
|
2666 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2667 |
|
|
|
2668 |
|
|
return 1;
|
2669 |
|
|
}
|
2670 |
|
|
|
2671 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
2672 |
|
|
if (for_gcse)
|
2673 |
|
|
{
|
2674 |
|
|
/* A volatile mem should not be considered equivalent to any
|
2675 |
|
|
other. */
|
2676 |
|
|
if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (y))
|
2677 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2678 |
|
|
|
2679 |
|
|
/* Can't merge two expressions in different alias sets, since we
|
2680 |
|
|
can decide that the expression is transparent in a block when
|
2681 |
|
|
it isn't, due to it being set with the different alias set.
|
2682 |
|
|
|
2683 |
|
|
Also, can't merge two expressions with different MEM_ATTRS.
|
2684 |
|
|
They could e.g. be two different entities allocated into the
|
2685 |
|
|
same space on the stack (see e.g. PR25130). In that case, the
|
2686 |
|
|
MEM addresses can be the same, even though the two MEMs are
|
2687 |
|
|
absolutely not equivalent.
|
2688 |
|
|
|
2689 |
|
|
But because really all MEM attributes should be the same for
|
2690 |
|
|
equivalent MEMs, we just use the invariant that MEMs that have
|
2691 |
|
|
the same attributes share the same mem_attrs data structure. */
|
2692 |
|
|
if (MEM_ATTRS (x) != MEM_ATTRS (y))
|
2693 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2694 |
|
|
}
|
2695 |
|
|
break;
|
2696 |
|
|
|
2697 |
|
|
/* For commutative operations, check both orders. */
|
2698 |
|
|
case PLUS:
|
2699 |
|
|
case MULT:
|
2700 |
|
|
case AND:
|
2701 |
|
|
case IOR:
|
2702 |
|
|
case XOR:
|
2703 |
|
|
case NE:
|
2704 |
|
|
case EQ:
|
2705 |
|
|
return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0),
|
2706 |
|
|
validate, for_gcse)
|
2707 |
|
|
&& exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
|
2708 |
|
|
validate, for_gcse))
|
2709 |
|
|
|| (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
|
2710 |
|
|
validate, for_gcse)
|
2711 |
|
|
&& exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
|
2712 |
|
|
validate, for_gcse)));
|
2713 |
|
|
|
2714 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
2715 |
|
|
/* We don't use the generic code below because we want to
|
2716 |
|
|
disregard filename and line numbers. */
|
2717 |
|
|
|
2718 |
|
|
/* A volatile asm isn't equivalent to any other. */
|
2719 |
|
|
if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (y))
|
2720 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2721 |
|
|
|
2722 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y)
|
2723 |
|
|
|| strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (x), ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (y))
|
2724 |
|
|
|| strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (x),
|
2725 |
|
|
ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (y))
|
2726 |
|
|
|| ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (x) != ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (y)
|
2727 |
|
|
|| ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) != ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (y))
|
2728 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2729 |
|
|
|
2730 |
|
|
if (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x))
|
2731 |
|
|
{
|
2732 |
|
|
for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
2733 |
|
|
if (! exp_equiv_p (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
|
2734 |
|
|
ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (y, i),
|
2735 |
|
|
validate, for_gcse)
|
2736 |
|
|
|| strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, i),
|
2737 |
|
|
ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (y, i)))
|
2738 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2739 |
|
|
}
|
2740 |
|
|
|
2741 |
|
|
return 1;
|
2742 |
|
|
|
2743 |
|
|
default:
|
2744 |
|
|
break;
|
2745 |
|
|
}
|
2746 |
|
|
|
2747 |
|
|
/* Compare the elements. If any pair of corresponding elements
|
2748 |
|
|
fail to match, return 0 for the whole thing. */
|
2749 |
|
|
|
2750 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
2751 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
2752 |
|
|
{
|
2753 |
|
|
switch (fmt[i])
|
2754 |
|
|
{
|
2755 |
|
|
case 'e':
|
2756 |
|
|
if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i),
|
2757 |
|
|
validate, for_gcse))
|
2758 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2759 |
|
|
break;
|
2760 |
|
|
|
2761 |
|
|
case 'E':
|
2762 |
|
|
if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
|
2763 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2764 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
2765 |
|
|
if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
|
2766 |
|
|
validate, for_gcse))
|
2767 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2768 |
|
|
break;
|
2769 |
|
|
|
2770 |
|
|
case 's':
|
2771 |
|
|
if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
|
2772 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2773 |
|
|
break;
|
2774 |
|
|
|
2775 |
|
|
case 'i':
|
2776 |
|
|
if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
|
2777 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2778 |
|
|
break;
|
2779 |
|
|
|
2780 |
|
|
case 'w':
|
2781 |
|
|
if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
|
2782 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2783 |
|
|
break;
|
2784 |
|
|
|
2785 |
|
|
case '0':
|
2786 |
|
|
case 't':
|
2787 |
|
|
break;
|
2788 |
|
|
|
2789 |
|
|
default:
|
2790 |
|
|
gcc_unreachable ();
|
2791 |
|
|
}
|
2792 |
|
|
}
|
2793 |
|
|
|
2794 |
|
|
return 1;
|
2795 |
|
|
}
|
2796 |
|
|
|
2797 |
|
|
/* Return 1 if X has a value that can vary even between two
|
2798 |
|
|
executions of the program. 0 means X can be compared reliably
|
2799 |
|
|
against certain constants or near-constants. */
|
2800 |
|
|
|
2801 |
|
|
static bool
|
2802 |
|
|
cse_rtx_varies_p (const_rtx x, bool from_alias)
|
2803 |
|
|
{
|
2804 |
|
|
/* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
|
2805 |
|
|
mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
|
2806 |
|
|
doesn't vary in any mode. */
|
2807 |
|
|
|
2808 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x)
|
2809 |
|
|
&& REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
|
2810 |
|
|
{
|
2811 |
|
|
int x_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
|
2812 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *x_ent = &qty_table[x_q];
|
2813 |
|
|
|
2814 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (x) == x_ent->mode
|
2815 |
|
|
&& x_ent->const_rtx != NULL_RTX)
|
2816 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2817 |
|
|
}
|
2818 |
|
|
|
2819 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
|
2820 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
2821 |
|
|
&& REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
|
2822 |
|
|
&& REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
|
2823 |
|
|
{
|
2824 |
|
|
int x0_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)));
|
2825 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *x0_ent = &qty_table[x0_q];
|
2826 |
|
|
|
2827 |
|
|
if ((GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == x0_ent->mode)
|
2828 |
|
|
&& x0_ent->const_rtx != NULL_RTX)
|
2829 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2830 |
|
|
}
|
2831 |
|
|
|
2832 |
|
|
/* This can happen as the result of virtual register instantiation, if
|
2833 |
|
|
the initial constant is too large to be a valid address. This gives
|
2834 |
|
|
us a three instruction sequence, load large offset into a register,
|
2835 |
|
|
load fp minus a constant into a register, then a MEM which is the
|
2836 |
|
|
sum of the two `constant' registers. */
|
2837 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
|
2838 |
|
|
&& REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
|
2839 |
|
|
&& REG_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
2840 |
|
|
&& REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
|
2841 |
|
|
&& REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
|
2842 |
|
|
{
|
2843 |
|
|
int x0_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)));
|
2844 |
|
|
int x1_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1)));
|
2845 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *x0_ent = &qty_table[x0_q];
|
2846 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *x1_ent = &qty_table[x1_q];
|
2847 |
|
|
|
2848 |
|
|
if ((GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == x0_ent->mode)
|
2849 |
|
|
&& x0_ent->const_rtx != NULL_RTX
|
2850 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == x1_ent->mode)
|
2851 |
|
|
&& x1_ent->const_rtx != NULL_RTX)
|
2852 |
|
|
return 0;
|
2853 |
|
|
}
|
2854 |
|
|
|
2855 |
|
|
return rtx_varies_p (x, from_alias);
|
2856 |
|
|
}
|
2857 |
|
|
|
2858 |
|
|
/* Subroutine of canon_reg. Pass *XLOC through canon_reg, and validate
|
2859 |
|
|
the result if necessary. INSN is as for canon_reg. */
|
2860 |
|
|
|
2861 |
|
|
static void
|
2862 |
|
|
validate_canon_reg (rtx *xloc, rtx insn)
|
2863 |
|
|
{
|
2864 |
|
|
if (*xloc)
|
2865 |
|
|
{
|
2866 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (*xloc, insn);
|
2867 |
|
|
|
2868 |
|
|
/* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
|
2869 |
|
|
insn remains valid. Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs. */
|
2870 |
|
|
gcc_assert (insn && new_rtx);
|
2871 |
|
|
validate_change (insn, xloc, new_rtx, 1);
|
2872 |
|
|
}
|
2873 |
|
|
}
|
2874 |
|
|
|
2875 |
|
|
/* Canonicalize an expression:
|
2876 |
|
|
replace each register reference inside it
|
2877 |
|
|
with the "oldest" equivalent register.
|
2878 |
|
|
|
2879 |
|
|
If INSN is nonzero validate_change is used to ensure that INSN remains valid
|
2880 |
|
|
after we make our substitution. The calls are made with IN_GROUP nonzero
|
2881 |
|
|
so apply_change_group must be called upon the outermost return from this
|
2882 |
|
|
function (unless INSN is zero). The result of apply_change_group can
|
2883 |
|
|
generally be discarded since the changes we are making are optional. */
|
2884 |
|
|
|
2885 |
|
|
static rtx
|
2886 |
|
|
canon_reg (rtx x, rtx insn)
|
2887 |
|
|
{
|
2888 |
|
|
int i;
|
2889 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
2890 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
2891 |
|
|
|
2892 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
2893 |
|
|
return x;
|
2894 |
|
|
|
2895 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
2896 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
2897 |
|
|
{
|
2898 |
|
|
case PC:
|
2899 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
2900 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
2901 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
2902 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
2903 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
2904 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
2905 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
2906 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
2907 |
|
|
case ADDR_VEC:
|
2908 |
|
|
case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
|
2909 |
|
|
return x;
|
2910 |
|
|
|
2911 |
|
|
case REG:
|
2912 |
|
|
{
|
2913 |
|
|
int first;
|
2914 |
|
|
int q;
|
2915 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *ent;
|
2916 |
|
|
|
2917 |
|
|
/* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
|
2918 |
|
|
in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
|
2919 |
|
|
of each occurrence. Also, some hard regs appear in
|
2920 |
|
|
MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered. Don't try to
|
2921 |
|
|
replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS. */
|
2922 |
|
|
if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
2923 |
|
|
|| ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
|
2924 |
|
|
return x;
|
2925 |
|
|
|
2926 |
|
|
q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
|
2927 |
|
|
ent = &qty_table[q];
|
2928 |
|
|
first = ent->first_reg;
|
2929 |
|
|
return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
|
2930 |
|
|
: REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
|
2931 |
|
|
: gen_rtx_REG (ent->mode, first));
|
2932 |
|
|
}
|
2933 |
|
|
|
2934 |
|
|
default:
|
2935 |
|
|
break;
|
2936 |
|
|
}
|
2937 |
|
|
|
2938 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
2939 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
2940 |
|
|
{
|
2941 |
|
|
int j;
|
2942 |
|
|
|
2943 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
2944 |
|
|
validate_canon_reg (&XEXP (x, i), insn);
|
2945 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
2946 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
2947 |
|
|
validate_canon_reg (&XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
|
2948 |
|
|
}
|
2949 |
|
|
|
2950 |
|
|
return x;
|
2951 |
|
|
}
|
2952 |
|
|
|
2953 |
|
|
/* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
|
2954 |
|
|
operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
|
2955 |
|
|
what values are being compared.
|
2956 |
|
|
|
2957 |
|
|
*PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
|
2958 |
|
|
actually being compared. For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
|
2959 |
|
|
was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
|
2960 |
|
|
compared to produce cc0.
|
2961 |
|
|
|
2962 |
|
|
The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
|
2963 |
|
|
A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison. */
|
2964 |
|
|
|
2965 |
|
|
static enum rtx_code
|
2966 |
|
|
find_comparison_args (enum rtx_code code, rtx *parg1, rtx *parg2,
|
2967 |
|
|
enum machine_mode *pmode1, enum machine_mode *pmode2)
|
2968 |
|
|
{
|
2969 |
|
|
rtx arg1, arg2;
|
2970 |
|
|
|
2971 |
|
|
arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
|
2972 |
|
|
|
2973 |
|
|
/* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to. */
|
2974 |
|
|
|
2975 |
|
|
while (arg2 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (arg1)))
|
2976 |
|
|
{
|
2977 |
|
|
/* Set nonzero when we find something of interest. */
|
2978 |
|
|
rtx x = 0;
|
2979 |
|
|
int reverse_code = 0;
|
2980 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p = 0;
|
2981 |
|
|
|
2982 |
|
|
/* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
|
2983 |
|
|
On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
|
2984 |
|
|
fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
|
2985 |
|
|
when given CC0. */
|
2986 |
|
|
|
2987 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
|
2988 |
|
|
x = arg1;
|
2989 |
|
|
|
2990 |
|
|
/* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
|
2991 |
|
|
STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments. */
|
2992 |
|
|
|
2993 |
|
|
else if (COMPARISON_P (arg1))
|
2994 |
|
|
{
|
2995 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
2996 |
|
|
REAL_VALUE_TYPE fsfv;
|
2997 |
|
|
#endif
|
2998 |
|
|
|
2999 |
|
|
if (code == NE
|
3000 |
|
|
|| (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
|
3001 |
|
|
&& code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
|
3002 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
3003 |
|
|
|| (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (arg1))
|
3004 |
|
|
&& (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
|
3005 |
|
|
REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
|
3006 |
|
|
#endif
|
3007 |
|
|
)
|
3008 |
|
|
x = arg1;
|
3009 |
|
|
else if (code == EQ
|
3010 |
|
|
|| (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
|
3011 |
|
|
&& code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
|
3012 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
3013 |
|
|
|| (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (arg1))
|
3014 |
|
|
&& (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
|
3015 |
|
|
REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
|
3016 |
|
|
#endif
|
3017 |
|
|
)
|
3018 |
|
|
x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
|
3019 |
|
|
}
|
3020 |
|
|
|
3021 |
|
|
/* ??? We could also check for
|
3022 |
|
|
|
3023 |
|
|
(ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
|
3024 |
|
|
|
3025 |
|
|
and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring. */
|
3026 |
|
|
|
3027 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
3028 |
|
|
/* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
|
3029 |
|
|
that lets us see what is being compared. */
|
3030 |
|
|
p = lookup (arg1, SAFE_HASH (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)), GET_MODE (arg1));
|
3031 |
|
|
if (p)
|
3032 |
|
|
{
|
3033 |
|
|
p = p->first_same_value;
|
3034 |
|
|
|
3035 |
|
|
/* If what we compare is already known to be constant, that is as
|
3036 |
|
|
good as it gets.
|
3037 |
|
|
We need to break the loop in this case, because otherwise we
|
3038 |
|
|
can have an infinite loop when looking at a reg that is known
|
3039 |
|
|
to be a constant which is the same as a comparison of a reg
|
3040 |
|
|
against zero which appears later in the insn stream, which in
|
3041 |
|
|
turn is constant and the same as the comparison of the first reg
|
3042 |
|
|
against zero... */
|
3043 |
|
|
if (p->is_const)
|
3044 |
|
|
break;
|
3045 |
|
|
}
|
3046 |
|
|
|
3047 |
|
|
for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
|
3048 |
|
|
{
|
3049 |
|
|
enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
|
3050 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
3051 |
|
|
REAL_VALUE_TYPE fsfv;
|
3052 |
|
|
#endif
|
3053 |
|
|
|
3054 |
|
|
/* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
|
3055 |
|
|
if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
|
3056 |
|
|
continue;
|
3057 |
|
|
|
3058 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
|
3059 |
|
|
/* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
|
3060 |
|
|
that includes the comparison code. In that case, ARG1 would
|
3061 |
|
|
be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
|
3062 |
|
|
either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero. If this is an NE operation,
|
3063 |
|
|
ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
|
3064 |
|
|
we must reverse ORIG_CODE. On machine with a negative value
|
3065 |
|
|
for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations. */
|
3066 |
|
|
|| ((code == NE
|
3067 |
|
|
|| (code == LT
|
3068 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
|
3069 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
|
3070 |
|
|
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
3071 |
|
|
&& (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
3072 |
|
|
& ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
|
3073 |
|
|
<< (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
|
3074 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
3075 |
|
|
|| (code == LT
|
3076 |
|
|
&& SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
|
3077 |
|
|
&& (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
|
3078 |
|
|
REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
|
3079 |
|
|
#endif
|
3080 |
|
|
)
|
3081 |
|
|
&& COMPARISON_P (p->exp)))
|
3082 |
|
|
{
|
3083 |
|
|
x = p->exp;
|
3084 |
|
|
break;
|
3085 |
|
|
}
|
3086 |
|
|
else if ((code == EQ
|
3087 |
|
|
|| (code == GE
|
3088 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
|
3089 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode)
|
3090 |
|
|
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
3091 |
|
|
&& (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
3092 |
|
|
& ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
|
3093 |
|
|
<< (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
|
3094 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
3095 |
|
|
|| (code == GE
|
3096 |
|
|
&& SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
|
3097 |
|
|
&& (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
|
3098 |
|
|
REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
|
3099 |
|
|
#endif
|
3100 |
|
|
)
|
3101 |
|
|
&& COMPARISON_P (p->exp))
|
3102 |
|
|
{
|
3103 |
|
|
reverse_code = 1;
|
3104 |
|
|
x = p->exp;
|
3105 |
|
|
break;
|
3106 |
|
|
}
|
3107 |
|
|
|
3108 |
|
|
/* If this non-trapping address, e.g. fp + constant, the
|
3109 |
|
|
equivalent is a better operand since it may let us predict
|
3110 |
|
|
the value of the comparison. */
|
3111 |
|
|
else if (!rtx_addr_can_trap_p (p->exp))
|
3112 |
|
|
{
|
3113 |
|
|
arg1 = p->exp;
|
3114 |
|
|
continue;
|
3115 |
|
|
}
|
3116 |
|
|
}
|
3117 |
|
|
|
3118 |
|
|
/* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
|
3119 |
|
|
Otherwise, set up for the next iteration. */
|
3120 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
3121 |
|
|
break;
|
3122 |
|
|
|
3123 |
|
|
/* If we need to reverse the comparison, make sure that that is
|
3124 |
|
|
possible -- we can't necessarily infer the value of GE from LT
|
3125 |
|
|
with floating-point operands. */
|
3126 |
|
|
if (reverse_code)
|
3127 |
|
|
{
|
3128 |
|
|
enum rtx_code reversed = reversed_comparison_code (x, NULL_RTX);
|
3129 |
|
|
if (reversed == UNKNOWN)
|
3130 |
|
|
break;
|
3131 |
|
|
else
|
3132 |
|
|
code = reversed;
|
3133 |
|
|
}
|
3134 |
|
|
else if (COMPARISON_P (x))
|
3135 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
3136 |
|
|
arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
|
3137 |
|
|
}
|
3138 |
|
|
|
3139 |
|
|
/* Return our results. Return the modes from before fold_rtx
|
3140 |
|
|
because fold_rtx might produce const_int, and then it's too late. */
|
3141 |
|
|
*pmode1 = GET_MODE (arg1), *pmode2 = GET_MODE (arg2);
|
3142 |
|
|
*parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
|
3143 |
|
|
|
3144 |
|
|
return code;
|
3145 |
|
|
}
|
3146 |
|
|
|
3147 |
|
|
/* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument for which
|
3148 |
|
|
a constant value can be determined, return the result of operating
|
3149 |
|
|
on that value, as a constant. Otherwise, return X, possibly with
|
3150 |
|
|
one or more operands changed to a forward-propagated constant.
|
3151 |
|
|
|
3152 |
|
|
If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT return
|
3153 |
|
|
those contents here; equiv_constant is called to perform that task.
|
3154 |
|
|
For SUBREGs and MEMs, we do that both here and in equiv_constant.
|
3155 |
|
|
|
3156 |
|
|
INSN is the insn that we may be modifying. If it is 0, make a copy
|
3157 |
|
|
of X before modifying it. */
|
3158 |
|
|
|
3159 |
|
|
static rtx
|
3160 |
|
|
fold_rtx (rtx x, rtx insn)
|
3161 |
|
|
{
|
3162 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
3163 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode;
|
3164 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
3165 |
|
|
int i;
|
3166 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = 0;
|
3167 |
|
|
int changed = 0;
|
3168 |
|
|
|
3169 |
|
|
/* Operands of X. */
|
3170 |
|
|
rtx folded_arg0;
|
3171 |
|
|
rtx folded_arg1;
|
3172 |
|
|
|
3173 |
|
|
/* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
|
3174 |
|
|
|
3175 |
|
|
rtx const_arg0;
|
3176 |
|
|
rtx const_arg1;
|
3177 |
|
|
rtx const_arg2;
|
3178 |
|
|
|
3179 |
|
|
/* The mode of the first operand of X. We need this for sign and zero
|
3180 |
|
|
extends. */
|
3181 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
|
3182 |
|
|
|
3183 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
3184 |
|
|
return x;
|
3185 |
|
|
|
3186 |
|
|
/* Try to perform some initial simplifications on X. */
|
3187 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
3188 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
3189 |
|
|
{
|
3190 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
3191 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
3192 |
|
|
if ((new_rtx = equiv_constant (x)) != NULL_RTX)
|
3193 |
|
|
return new_rtx;
|
3194 |
|
|
return x;
|
3195 |
|
|
|
3196 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
3197 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
3198 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
3199 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
3200 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
3201 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
3202 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
3203 |
|
|
case REG:
|
3204 |
|
|
case PC:
|
3205 |
|
|
/* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
|
3206 |
|
|
since they are used only for lists of args
|
3207 |
|
|
in a function call's REG_EQUAL note. */
|
3208 |
|
|
case EXPR_LIST:
|
3209 |
|
|
return x;
|
3210 |
|
|
|
3211 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
3212 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
3213 |
|
|
return prev_insn_cc0;
|
3214 |
|
|
#endif
|
3215 |
|
|
|
3216 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
3217 |
|
|
if (insn)
|
3218 |
|
|
{
|
3219 |
|
|
for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
3220 |
|
|
validate_change (insn, &ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
|
3221 |
|
|
fold_rtx (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), insn), 0);
|
3222 |
|
|
}
|
3223 |
|
|
return x;
|
3224 |
|
|
|
3225 |
|
|
#ifdef NO_FUNCTION_CSE
|
3226 |
|
|
case CALL:
|
3227 |
|
|
if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
|
3228 |
|
|
return x;
|
3229 |
|
|
break;
|
3230 |
|
|
#endif
|
3231 |
|
|
|
3232 |
|
|
/* Anything else goes through the loop below. */
|
3233 |
|
|
default:
|
3234 |
|
|
break;
|
3235 |
|
|
}
|
3236 |
|
|
|
3237 |
|
|
mode = GET_MODE (x);
|
3238 |
|
|
const_arg0 = 0;
|
3239 |
|
|
const_arg1 = 0;
|
3240 |
|
|
const_arg2 = 0;
|
3241 |
|
|
mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
|
3242 |
|
|
|
3243 |
|
|
/* Try folding our operands.
|
3244 |
|
|
Then see which ones have constant values known. */
|
3245 |
|
|
|
3246 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
3247 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
3248 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
3249 |
|
|
{
|
3250 |
|
|
rtx folded_arg = XEXP (x, i), const_arg;
|
3251 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (folded_arg);
|
3252 |
|
|
|
3253 |
|
|
switch (GET_CODE (folded_arg))
|
3254 |
|
|
{
|
3255 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
3256 |
|
|
case REG:
|
3257 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
3258 |
|
|
const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
|
3259 |
|
|
break;
|
3260 |
|
|
|
3261 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
3262 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
3263 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
3264 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
3265 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
3266 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
3267 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
3268 |
|
|
const_arg = folded_arg;
|
3269 |
|
|
break;
|
3270 |
|
|
|
3271 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
3272 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
3273 |
|
|
folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
|
3274 |
|
|
mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
|
3275 |
|
|
const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
|
3276 |
|
|
break;
|
3277 |
|
|
#endif
|
3278 |
|
|
|
3279 |
|
|
default:
|
3280 |
|
|
folded_arg = fold_rtx (folded_arg, insn);
|
3281 |
|
|
const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
|
3282 |
|
|
break;
|
3283 |
|
|
}
|
3284 |
|
|
|
3285 |
|
|
/* For the first three operands, see if the operand
|
3286 |
|
|
is constant or equivalent to a constant. */
|
3287 |
|
|
switch (i)
|
3288 |
|
|
{
|
3289 |
|
|
case 0:
|
3290 |
|
|
folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
|
3291 |
|
|
const_arg0 = const_arg;
|
3292 |
|
|
mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
|
3293 |
|
|
break;
|
3294 |
|
|
case 1:
|
3295 |
|
|
folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
|
3296 |
|
|
const_arg1 = const_arg;
|
3297 |
|
|
break;
|
3298 |
|
|
case 2:
|
3299 |
|
|
const_arg2 = const_arg;
|
3300 |
|
|
break;
|
3301 |
|
|
}
|
3302 |
|
|
|
3303 |
|
|
/* Pick the least expensive of the argument and an equivalent constant
|
3304 |
|
|
argument. */
|
3305 |
|
|
if (const_arg != 0
|
3306 |
|
|
&& const_arg != folded_arg
|
3307 |
|
|
&& COST_IN (const_arg, code) <= COST_IN (folded_arg, code)
|
3308 |
|
|
|
3309 |
|
|
/* It's not safe to substitute the operand of a conversion
|
3310 |
|
|
operator with a constant, as the conversion's identity
|
3311 |
|
|
depends upon the mode of its operand. This optimization
|
3312 |
|
|
is handled by the call to simplify_unary_operation. */
|
3313 |
|
|
&& (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != RTX_UNARY
|
3314 |
|
|
|| GET_MODE (const_arg) == mode_arg0
|
3315 |
|
|
|| (code != ZERO_EXTEND
|
3316 |
|
|
&& code != SIGN_EXTEND
|
3317 |
|
|
&& code != TRUNCATE
|
3318 |
|
|
&& code != FLOAT_TRUNCATE
|
3319 |
|
|
&& code != FLOAT_EXTEND
|
3320 |
|
|
&& code != FLOAT
|
3321 |
|
|
&& code != FIX
|
3322 |
|
|
&& code != UNSIGNED_FLOAT
|
3323 |
|
|
&& code != UNSIGNED_FIX)))
|
3324 |
|
|
folded_arg = const_arg;
|
3325 |
|
|
|
3326 |
|
|
if (folded_arg == XEXP (x, i))
|
3327 |
|
|
continue;
|
3328 |
|
|
|
3329 |
|
|
if (insn == NULL_RTX && !changed)
|
3330 |
|
|
x = copy_rtx (x);
|
3331 |
|
|
changed = 1;
|
3332 |
|
|
validate_unshare_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), folded_arg, 1);
|
3333 |
|
|
}
|
3334 |
|
|
|
3335 |
|
|
if (changed)
|
3336 |
|
|
{
|
3337 |
|
|
/* Canonicalize X if necessary, and keep const_argN and folded_argN
|
3338 |
|
|
consistent with the order in X. */
|
3339 |
|
|
if (canonicalize_change_group (insn, x))
|
3340 |
|
|
{
|
3341 |
|
|
rtx tem;
|
3342 |
|
|
tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
|
3343 |
|
|
tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
|
3344 |
|
|
}
|
3345 |
|
|
|
3346 |
|
|
apply_change_group ();
|
3347 |
|
|
}
|
3348 |
|
|
|
3349 |
|
|
/* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it. */
|
3350 |
|
|
|
3351 |
|
|
switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
|
3352 |
|
|
{
|
3353 |
|
|
case RTX_UNARY:
|
3354 |
|
|
{
|
3355 |
|
|
/* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the
|
3356 |
|
|
original mode. */
|
3357 |
|
|
if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
|
3358 |
|
|
&& mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
|
3359 |
|
|
break;
|
3360 |
|
|
|
3361 |
|
|
new_rtx = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
|
3362 |
|
|
const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
|
3363 |
|
|
mode_arg0);
|
3364 |
|
|
}
|
3365 |
|
|
break;
|
3366 |
|
|
|
3367 |
|
|
case RTX_COMPARE:
|
3368 |
|
|
case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
|
3369 |
|
|
/* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
|
3370 |
|
|
to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code. If any are
|
3371 |
|
|
constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately. We needn't
|
3372 |
|
|
do anything if both operands are already known to be constant. */
|
3373 |
|
|
|
3374 |
|
|
/* ??? Vector mode comparisons are not supported yet. */
|
3375 |
|
|
if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
|
3376 |
|
|
break;
|
3377 |
|
|
|
3378 |
|
|
if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
|
3379 |
|
|
{
|
3380 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
|
3381 |
|
|
rtx true_rtx, false_rtx;
|
3382 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode_arg1;
|
3383 |
|
|
|
3384 |
|
|
if (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
|
3385 |
|
|
{
|
3386 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
3387 |
|
|
true_rtx = (CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE
|
3388 |
|
|
(FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (mode), mode));
|
3389 |
|
|
#else
|
3390 |
|
|
true_rtx = NULL_RTX;
|
3391 |
|
|
#endif
|
3392 |
|
|
false_rtx = CONST0_RTX (mode);
|
3393 |
|
|
}
|
3394 |
|
|
else
|
3395 |
|
|
{
|
3396 |
|
|
true_rtx = const_true_rtx;
|
3397 |
|
|
false_rtx = const0_rtx;
|
3398 |
|
|
}
|
3399 |
|
|
|
3400 |
|
|
code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1,
|
3401 |
|
|
&mode_arg0, &mode_arg1);
|
3402 |
|
|
|
3403 |
|
|
/* If the mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know
|
3404 |
|
|
what kinds of things are being compared, so we can't do
|
3405 |
|
|
anything with this comparison. */
|
3406 |
|
|
|
3407 |
|
|
if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
|
3408 |
|
|
break;
|
3409 |
|
|
|
3410 |
|
|
const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
|
3411 |
|
|
const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
|
3412 |
|
|
|
3413 |
|
|
/* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see
|
3414 |
|
|
if we can nevertheless deduce some things about the
|
3415 |
|
|
comparison. */
|
3416 |
|
|
if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
|
3417 |
|
|
{
|
3418 |
|
|
if (const_arg1 != NULL)
|
3419 |
|
|
{
|
3420 |
|
|
rtx cheapest_simplification;
|
3421 |
|
|
int cheapest_cost;
|
3422 |
|
|
rtx simp_result;
|
3423 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p;
|
3424 |
|
|
|
3425 |
|
|
/* See if we can find an equivalent of folded_arg0
|
3426 |
|
|
that gets us a cheaper expression, possibly a
|
3427 |
|
|
constant through simplifications. */
|
3428 |
|
|
p = lookup (folded_arg0, SAFE_HASH (folded_arg0, mode_arg0),
|
3429 |
|
|
mode_arg0);
|
3430 |
|
|
|
3431 |
|
|
if (p != NULL)
|
3432 |
|
|
{
|
3433 |
|
|
cheapest_simplification = x;
|
3434 |
|
|
cheapest_cost = COST (x);
|
3435 |
|
|
|
3436 |
|
|
for (p = p->first_same_value; p != NULL; p = p->next_same_value)
|
3437 |
|
|
{
|
3438 |
|
|
int cost;
|
3439 |
|
|
|
3440 |
|
|
/* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
|
3441 |
|
|
if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
|
3442 |
|
|
continue;
|
3443 |
|
|
|
3444 |
|
|
/* Try to simplify using this equivalence. */
|
3445 |
|
|
simp_result
|
3446 |
|
|
= simplify_relational_operation (code, mode,
|
3447 |
|
|
mode_arg0,
|
3448 |
|
|
p->exp,
|
3449 |
|
|
const_arg1);
|
3450 |
|
|
|
3451 |
|
|
if (simp_result == NULL)
|
3452 |
|
|
continue;
|
3453 |
|
|
|
3454 |
|
|
cost = COST (simp_result);
|
3455 |
|
|
if (cost < cheapest_cost)
|
3456 |
|
|
{
|
3457 |
|
|
cheapest_cost = cost;
|
3458 |
|
|
cheapest_simplification = simp_result;
|
3459 |
|
|
}
|
3460 |
|
|
}
|
3461 |
|
|
|
3462 |
|
|
/* If we have a cheaper expression now, use that
|
3463 |
|
|
and try folding it further, from the top. */
|
3464 |
|
|
if (cheapest_simplification != x)
|
3465 |
|
|
return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (cheapest_simplification),
|
3466 |
|
|
insn);
|
3467 |
|
|
}
|
3468 |
|
|
}
|
3469 |
|
|
|
3470 |
|
|
/* See if the two operands are the same. */
|
3471 |
|
|
|
3472 |
|
|
if ((REG_P (folded_arg0)
|
3473 |
|
|
&& REG_P (folded_arg1)
|
3474 |
|
|
&& (REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg0))
|
3475 |
|
|
== REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg1))))
|
3476 |
|
|
|| ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
|
3477 |
|
|
SAFE_HASH (folded_arg0, mode_arg0),
|
3478 |
|
|
mode_arg0))
|
3479 |
|
|
&& (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
|
3480 |
|
|
SAFE_HASH (folded_arg1, mode_arg0),
|
3481 |
|
|
mode_arg0))
|
3482 |
|
|
&& p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value))
|
3483 |
|
|
folded_arg1 = folded_arg0;
|
3484 |
|
|
|
3485 |
|
|
/* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
|
3486 |
|
|
doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
|
3487 |
|
|
(we only check the reverse if not floating-point). */
|
3488 |
|
|
else if (REG_P (folded_arg0))
|
3489 |
|
|
{
|
3490 |
|
|
int qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg0));
|
3491 |
|
|
|
3492 |
|
|
if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0)))
|
3493 |
|
|
{
|
3494 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[qty];
|
3495 |
|
|
|
3496 |
|
|
if ((comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code, code)
|
3497 |
|
|
|| (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode_arg0)
|
3498 |
|
|
&& comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code,
|
3499 |
|
|
reverse_condition (code))))
|
3500 |
|
|
&& (rtx_equal_p (ent->comparison_const, folded_arg1)
|
3501 |
|
|
|| (const_arg1
|
3502 |
|
|
&& rtx_equal_p (ent->comparison_const,
|
3503 |
|
|
const_arg1))
|
3504 |
|
|
|| (REG_P (folded_arg1)
|
3505 |
|
|
&& (REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg1)) == ent->comparison_qty))))
|
3506 |
|
|
{
|
3507 |
|
|
if (comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code, code))
|
3508 |
|
|
{
|
3509 |
|
|
if (true_rtx)
|
3510 |
|
|
return true_rtx;
|
3511 |
|
|
else
|
3512 |
|
|
break;
|
3513 |
|
|
}
|
3514 |
|
|
else
|
3515 |
|
|
return false_rtx;
|
3516 |
|
|
}
|
3517 |
|
|
}
|
3518 |
|
|
}
|
3519 |
|
|
}
|
3520 |
|
|
}
|
3521 |
|
|
|
3522 |
|
|
/* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
|
3523 |
|
|
equivalent to an IOR with a constant. If so, we may be able to
|
3524 |
|
|
determine the result of this comparison. */
|
3525 |
|
|
if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx && !const_arg0)
|
3526 |
|
|
{
|
3527 |
|
|
rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
|
3528 |
|
|
rtx inner_const;
|
3529 |
|
|
|
3530 |
|
|
if (y != 0
|
3531 |
|
|
&& (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
|
3532 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (inner_const)
|
3533 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
|
3534 |
|
|
folded_arg0 = gen_rtx_IOR (mode_arg0, XEXP (y, 0), inner_const);
|
3535 |
|
|
}
|
3536 |
|
|
|
3537 |
|
|
{
|
3538 |
|
|
rtx op0 = const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0;
|
3539 |
|
|
rtx op1 = const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1;
|
3540 |
|
|
new_rtx = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0, op0, op1);
|
3541 |
|
|
}
|
3542 |
|
|
break;
|
3543 |
|
|
|
3544 |
|
|
case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
|
3545 |
|
|
case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
|
3546 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
3547 |
|
|
{
|
3548 |
|
|
case PLUS:
|
3549 |
|
|
/* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
|
3550 |
|
|
with that LABEL_REF as its second operand. If so, the result is
|
3551 |
|
|
the first operand of that MINUS. This handles switches with an
|
3552 |
|
|
ADDR_DIFF_VEC table. */
|
3553 |
|
|
if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
|
3554 |
|
|
{
|
3555 |
|
|
rtx y
|
3556 |
|
|
= GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == MINUS ? folded_arg0
|
3557 |
|
|
: lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
|
3558 |
|
|
|
3559 |
|
|
if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
|
3560 |
|
|
&& XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
|
3561 |
|
|
return XEXP (y, 0);
|
3562 |
|
|
|
3563 |
|
|
/* Now try for a CONST of a MINUS like the above. */
|
3564 |
|
|
if ((y = (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST ? folded_arg0
|
3565 |
|
|
: lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, CONST))) != 0
|
3566 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MINUS
|
3567 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF
|
3568 |
|
|
&& XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
|
3569 |
|
|
return XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
|
3570 |
|
|
}
|
3571 |
|
|
|
3572 |
|
|
/* Likewise if the operands are in the other order. */
|
3573 |
|
|
if (const_arg0 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == LABEL_REF)
|
3574 |
|
|
{
|
3575 |
|
|
rtx y
|
3576 |
|
|
= GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == MINUS ? folded_arg1
|
3577 |
|
|
: lookup_as_function (folded_arg1, MINUS);
|
3578 |
|
|
|
3579 |
|
|
if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
|
3580 |
|
|
&& XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg0, 0))
|
3581 |
|
|
return XEXP (y, 0);
|
3582 |
|
|
|
3583 |
|
|
/* Now try for a CONST of a MINUS like the above. */
|
3584 |
|
|
if ((y = (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == CONST ? folded_arg1
|
3585 |
|
|
: lookup_as_function (folded_arg1, CONST))) != 0
|
3586 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MINUS
|
3587 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF
|
3588 |
|
|
&& XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg0, 0))
|
3589 |
|
|
return XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
|
3590 |
|
|
}
|
3591 |
|
|
|
3592 |
|
|
/* If second operand is a register equivalent to a negative
|
3593 |
|
|
CONST_INT, see if we can find a register equivalent to the
|
3594 |
|
|
positive constant. Make a MINUS if so. Don't do this for
|
3595 |
|
|
a non-negative constant since we might then alternate between
|
3596 |
|
|
choosing positive and negative constants. Having the positive
|
3597 |
|
|
constant previously-used is the more common case. Be sure
|
3598 |
|
|
the resulting constant is non-negative; if const_arg1 were
|
3599 |
|
|
the smallest negative number this would overflow: depending
|
3600 |
|
|
on the mode, this would either just be the same value (and
|
3601 |
|
|
hence not save anything) or be incorrect. */
|
3602 |
|
|
if (const_arg1 != 0 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1)
|
3603 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0
|
3604 |
|
|
/* This used to test
|
3605 |
|
|
|
3606 |
|
|
-INTVAL (const_arg1) >= 0
|
3607 |
|
|
|
3608 |
|
|
But The Sun V5.0 compilers mis-compiled that test. So
|
3609 |
|
|
instead we test for the problematic value in a more direct
|
3610 |
|
|
manner and hope the Sun compilers get it correct. */
|
3611 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (const_arg1) !=
|
3612 |
|
|
((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - 1))
|
3613 |
|
|
&& REG_P (folded_arg1))
|
3614 |
|
|
{
|
3615 |
|
|
rtx new_const = GEN_INT (-INTVAL (const_arg1));
|
3616 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p
|
3617 |
|
|
= lookup (new_const, SAFE_HASH (new_const, mode), mode);
|
3618 |
|
|
|
3619 |
|
|
if (p)
|
3620 |
|
|
for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
|
3621 |
|
|
if (REG_P (p->exp))
|
3622 |
|
|
return simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, folded_arg0,
|
3623 |
|
|
canon_reg (p->exp, NULL_RTX));
|
3624 |
|
|
}
|
3625 |
|
|
goto from_plus;
|
3626 |
|
|
|
3627 |
|
|
case MINUS:
|
3628 |
|
|
/* If we have (MINUS Y C), see if Y is known to be (PLUS Z C2).
|
3629 |
|
|
If so, produce (PLUS Z C2-C). */
|
3630 |
|
|
if (const_arg1 != 0 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1))
|
3631 |
|
|
{
|
3632 |
|
|
rtx y = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), PLUS);
|
3633 |
|
|
if (y && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (y, 1)))
|
3634 |
|
|
return fold_rtx (plus_constant (copy_rtx (y),
|
3635 |
|
|
-INTVAL (const_arg1)),
|
3636 |
|
|
NULL_RTX);
|
3637 |
|
|
}
|
3638 |
|
|
|
3639 |
|
|
/* Fall through. */
|
3640 |
|
|
|
3641 |
|
|
from_plus:
|
3642 |
|
|
case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
|
3643 |
|
|
case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
|
3644 |
|
|
case MULT:
|
3645 |
|
|
case ASHIFT: case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
|
3646 |
|
|
/* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
|
3647 |
|
|
is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
|
3648 |
|
|
operation with a combined operation. This may eliminate the
|
3649 |
|
|
intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
|
3650 |
|
|
Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
|
3651 |
|
|
if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference. */
|
3652 |
|
|
|
3653 |
|
|
if (REG_P (folded_arg0)
|
3654 |
|
|
&& const_arg1 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1))
|
3655 |
|
|
{
|
3656 |
|
|
int is_shift
|
3657 |
|
|
= (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
|
3658 |
|
|
rtx y, inner_const, new_const;
|
3659 |
|
|
rtx canon_const_arg1 = const_arg1;
|
3660 |
|
|
enum rtx_code associate_code;
|
3661 |
|
|
|
3662 |
|
|
if (is_shift
|
3663 |
|
|
&& (INTVAL (const_arg1) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)
|
3664 |
|
|
|| INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0))
|
3665 |
|
|
{
|
3666 |
|
|
if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
|
3667 |
|
|
canon_const_arg1 = GEN_INT (INTVAL (const_arg1)
|
3668 |
|
|
& (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)
|
3669 |
|
|
- 1));
|
3670 |
|
|
else
|
3671 |
|
|
break;
|
3672 |
|
|
}
|
3673 |
|
|
|
3674 |
|
|
y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
|
3675 |
|
|
if (y == 0)
|
3676 |
|
|
break;
|
3677 |
|
|
|
3678 |
|
|
/* If we have compiled a statement like
|
3679 |
|
|
"if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
|
3680 |
|
|
"x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
|
3681 |
|
|
of Y is the same as our first operand. Unless we detect
|
3682 |
|
|
this case, an infinite loop will result. */
|
3683 |
|
|
if (XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
|
3684 |
|
|
break;
|
3685 |
|
|
|
3686 |
|
|
inner_const = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0));
|
3687 |
|
|
if (!inner_const || !CONST_INT_P (inner_const))
|
3688 |
|
|
break;
|
3689 |
|
|
|
3690 |
|
|
/* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
|
3691 |
|
|
same constant and it is a power of two. These might be doable
|
3692 |
|
|
with a pre- or post-increment. Similarly for two subtracts of
|
3693 |
|
|
identical powers of two with post decrement. */
|
3694 |
|
|
|
3695 |
|
|
if (code == PLUS && const_arg1 == inner_const
|
3696 |
|
|
&& ((HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
|
3697 |
|
|
&& exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0)
|
3698 |
|
|
|| (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
|
3699 |
|
|
&& exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0)
|
3700 |
|
|
|| (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
|
3701 |
|
|
&& exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0)
|
3702 |
|
|
|| (HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
|
3703 |
|
|
&& exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0)))
|
3704 |
|
|
break;
|
3705 |
|
|
|
3706 |
|
|
/* ??? Vector mode shifts by scalar
|
3707 |
|
|
shift operand are not supported yet. */
|
3708 |
|
|
if (is_shift && VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
|
3709 |
|
|
break;
|
3710 |
|
|
|
3711 |
|
|
if (is_shift
|
3712 |
|
|
&& (INTVAL (inner_const) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode)
|
3713 |
|
|
|| INTVAL (inner_const) < 0))
|
3714 |
|
|
{
|
3715 |
|
|
if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
|
3716 |
|
|
inner_const = GEN_INT (INTVAL (inner_const)
|
3717 |
|
|
& (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1));
|
3718 |
|
|
else
|
3719 |
|
|
break;
|
3720 |
|
|
}
|
3721 |
|
|
|
3722 |
|
|
/* Compute the code used to compose the constants. For example,
|
3723 |
|
|
A-C1-C2 is A-(C1 + C2), so if CODE == MINUS, we want PLUS. */
|
3724 |
|
|
|
3725 |
|
|
associate_code = (is_shift || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
|
3726 |
|
|
|
3727 |
|
|
new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
|
3728 |
|
|
canon_const_arg1,
|
3729 |
|
|
inner_const);
|
3730 |
|
|
|
3731 |
|
|
if (new_const == 0)
|
3732 |
|
|
break;
|
3733 |
|
|
|
3734 |
|
|
/* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
|
3735 |
|
|
produce a shift of the size of the object or larger.
|
3736 |
|
|
This could occur when we follow a sign-extend by a right
|
3737 |
|
|
shift on a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair
|
3738 |
|
|
of shifts. */
|
3739 |
|
|
|
3740 |
|
|
if (is_shift
|
3741 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (new_const)
|
3742 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (new_const) >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
|
3743 |
|
|
{
|
3744 |
|
|
/* As an exception, we can turn an ASHIFTRT of this
|
3745 |
|
|
form into a shift of the number of bits - 1. */
|
3746 |
|
|
if (code == ASHIFTRT)
|
3747 |
|
|
new_const = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1);
|
3748 |
|
|
else if (!side_effects_p (XEXP (y, 0)))
|
3749 |
|
|
return CONST0_RTX (mode);
|
3750 |
|
|
else
|
3751 |
|
|
break;
|
3752 |
|
|
}
|
3753 |
|
|
|
3754 |
|
|
y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
|
3755 |
|
|
|
3756 |
|
|
/* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
|
3757 |
|
|
can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
|
3758 |
|
|
loop if we tried to fold it. So don't in that case. */
|
3759 |
|
|
|
3760 |
|
|
if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
|
3761 |
|
|
y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
|
3762 |
|
|
|
3763 |
|
|
return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, y, new_const);
|
3764 |
|
|
}
|
3765 |
|
|
break;
|
3766 |
|
|
|
3767 |
|
|
case DIV: case UDIV:
|
3768 |
|
|
/* ??? The associative optimization performed immediately above is
|
3769 |
|
|
also possible for DIV and UDIV using associate_code of MULT.
|
3770 |
|
|
However, we would need extra code to verify that the
|
3771 |
|
|
multiplication does not overflow, that is, there is no overflow
|
3772 |
|
|
in the calculation of new_const. */
|
3773 |
|
|
break;
|
3774 |
|
|
|
3775 |
|
|
default:
|
3776 |
|
|
break;
|
3777 |
|
|
}
|
3778 |
|
|
|
3779 |
|
|
new_rtx = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
|
3780 |
|
|
const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
|
3781 |
|
|
const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
|
3782 |
|
|
break;
|
3783 |
|
|
|
3784 |
|
|
case RTX_OBJ:
|
3785 |
|
|
/* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X. */
|
3786 |
|
|
if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
|
3787 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
|
3788 |
|
|
&& rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
|
3789 |
|
|
return const_arg1;
|
3790 |
|
|
break;
|
3791 |
|
|
|
3792 |
|
|
case RTX_TERNARY:
|
3793 |
|
|
case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
|
3794 |
|
|
new_rtx = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
|
3795 |
|
|
const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
|
3796 |
|
|
const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
|
3797 |
|
|
const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
|
3798 |
|
|
break;
|
3799 |
|
|
|
3800 |
|
|
default:
|
3801 |
|
|
break;
|
3802 |
|
|
}
|
3803 |
|
|
|
3804 |
|
|
return new_rtx ? new_rtx : x;
|
3805 |
|
|
}
|
3806 |
|
|
|
3807 |
|
|
/* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
|
3808 |
|
|
Return 0 if we don't know one. */
|
3809 |
|
|
|
3810 |
|
|
static rtx
|
3811 |
|
|
equiv_constant (rtx x)
|
3812 |
|
|
{
|
3813 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x)
|
3814 |
|
|
&& REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
|
3815 |
|
|
{
|
3816 |
|
|
int x_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
|
3817 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *x_ent = &qty_table[x_q];
|
3818 |
|
|
|
3819 |
|
|
if (x_ent->const_rtx)
|
3820 |
|
|
x = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), x_ent->const_rtx);
|
3821 |
|
|
}
|
3822 |
|
|
|
3823 |
|
|
if (x == 0 || CONSTANT_P (x))
|
3824 |
|
|
return x;
|
3825 |
|
|
|
3826 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
|
3827 |
|
|
{
|
3828 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
|
3829 |
|
|
enum machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
|
3830 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx;
|
3831 |
|
|
|
3832 |
|
|
/* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG. */
|
3833 |
|
|
if ((new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
|
3834 |
|
|
|| (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0
|
3835 |
|
|
|| (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_FIXED)) != 0)
|
3836 |
|
|
return new_rtx;
|
3837 |
|
|
|
3838 |
|
|
/* If we didn't and if doing so makes sense, see if we previously
|
3839 |
|
|
assigned a constant value to the enclosing word mode SUBREG. */
|
3840 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode)
|
3841 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_SIZE (word_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (imode))
|
3842 |
|
|
{
|
3843 |
|
|
int byte = SUBREG_BYTE (x) - subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, word_mode);
|
3844 |
|
|
if (byte >= 0 && (byte % UNITS_PER_WORD) == 0)
|
3845 |
|
|
{
|
3846 |
|
|
rtx y = gen_rtx_SUBREG (word_mode, SUBREG_REG (x), byte);
|
3847 |
|
|
new_rtx = lookup_as_function (y, CONST_INT);
|
3848 |
|
|
if (new_rtx)
|
3849 |
|
|
return gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
|
3850 |
|
|
}
|
3851 |
|
|
}
|
3852 |
|
|
|
3853 |
|
|
/* Otherwise see if we already have a constant for the inner REG. */
|
3854 |
|
|
if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
|
3855 |
|
|
&& (new_rtx = equiv_constant (SUBREG_REG (x))) != 0)
|
3856 |
|
|
return simplify_subreg (mode, new_rtx, imode, SUBREG_BYTE (x));
|
3857 |
|
|
|
3858 |
|
|
return 0;
|
3859 |
|
|
}
|
3860 |
|
|
|
3861 |
|
|
/* If X is a MEM, see if it is a constant-pool reference, or look it up in
|
3862 |
|
|
the hash table in case its value was seen before. */
|
3863 |
|
|
|
3864 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (x))
|
3865 |
|
|
{
|
3866 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
3867 |
|
|
|
3868 |
|
|
x = avoid_constant_pool_reference (x);
|
3869 |
|
|
if (CONSTANT_P (x))
|
3870 |
|
|
return x;
|
3871 |
|
|
|
3872 |
|
|
elt = lookup (x, SAFE_HASH (x, GET_MODE (x)), GET_MODE (x));
|
3873 |
|
|
if (elt == 0)
|
3874 |
|
|
return 0;
|
3875 |
|
|
|
3876 |
|
|
for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
|
3877 |
|
|
if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
|
3878 |
|
|
return elt->exp;
|
3879 |
|
|
}
|
3880 |
|
|
|
3881 |
|
|
return 0;
|
3882 |
|
|
}
|
3883 |
|
|
|
3884 |
|
|
/* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the
|
3885 |
|
|
"taken" branch.
|
3886 |
|
|
|
3887 |
|
|
In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence. For example,
|
3888 |
|
|
if we are following the taken case of
|
3889 |
|
|
if (i == 2)
|
3890 |
|
|
we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
|
3891 |
|
|
|
3892 |
|
|
In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed. If the same
|
3893 |
|
|
comparison is seen later, we will know its value. */
|
3894 |
|
|
|
3895 |
|
|
static void
|
3896 |
|
|
record_jump_equiv (rtx insn, bool taken)
|
3897 |
|
|
{
|
3898 |
|
|
int cond_known_true;
|
3899 |
|
|
rtx op0, op1;
|
3900 |
|
|
rtx set;
|
3901 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode, mode0, mode1;
|
3902 |
|
|
int reversed_nonequality = 0;
|
3903 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
3904 |
|
|
|
3905 |
|
|
/* Ensure this is the right kind of insn. */
|
3906 |
|
|
gcc_assert (any_condjump_p (insn));
|
3907 |
|
|
|
3908 |
|
|
set = pc_set (insn);
|
3909 |
|
|
|
3910 |
|
|
/* See if this jump condition is known true or false. */
|
3911 |
|
|
if (taken)
|
3912 |
|
|
cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 2) == pc_rtx);
|
3913 |
|
|
else
|
3914 |
|
|
cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 1) == pc_rtx);
|
3915 |
|
|
|
3916 |
|
|
/* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
|
3917 |
|
|
If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
|
3918 |
|
|
know that it isn't valid for floating-point. */
|
3919 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0));
|
3920 |
|
|
op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0), 0), insn);
|
3921 |
|
|
op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0), 1), insn);
|
3922 |
|
|
|
3923 |
|
|
code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1, &mode0, &mode1);
|
3924 |
|
|
if (! cond_known_true)
|
3925 |
|
|
{
|
3926 |
|
|
code = reversed_comparison_code_parts (code, op0, op1, insn);
|
3927 |
|
|
|
3928 |
|
|
/* Don't remember if we can't find the inverse. */
|
3929 |
|
|
if (code == UNKNOWN)
|
3930 |
|
|
return;
|
3931 |
|
|
}
|
3932 |
|
|
|
3933 |
|
|
/* The mode is the mode of the non-constant. */
|
3934 |
|
|
mode = mode0;
|
3935 |
|
|
if (mode1 != VOIDmode)
|
3936 |
|
|
mode = mode1;
|
3937 |
|
|
|
3938 |
|
|
record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
|
3939 |
|
|
}
|
3940 |
|
|
|
3941 |
|
|
/* Yet another form of subreg creation. In this case, we want something in
|
3942 |
|
|
MODE, and we should assume OP has MODE iff it is naturally modeless. */
|
3943 |
|
|
|
3944 |
|
|
static rtx
|
3945 |
|
|
record_jump_cond_subreg (enum machine_mode mode, rtx op)
|
3946 |
|
|
{
|
3947 |
|
|
enum machine_mode op_mode = GET_MODE (op);
|
3948 |
|
|
if (op_mode == mode || op_mode == VOIDmode)
|
3949 |
|
|
return op;
|
3950 |
|
|
return lowpart_subreg (mode, op, op_mode);
|
3951 |
|
|
}
|
3952 |
|
|
|
3953 |
|
|
/* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
|
3954 |
|
|
REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
|
3955 |
|
|
Make any useful entries we can with that information. Called from
|
3956 |
|
|
above function and called recursively. */
|
3957 |
|
|
|
3958 |
|
|
static void
|
3959 |
|
|
record_jump_cond (enum rtx_code code, enum machine_mode mode, rtx op0,
|
3960 |
|
|
rtx op1, int reversed_nonequality)
|
3961 |
|
|
{
|
3962 |
|
|
unsigned op0_hash, op1_hash;
|
3963 |
|
|
int op0_in_memory, op1_in_memory;
|
3964 |
|
|
struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
|
3965 |
|
|
|
3966 |
|
|
/* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
|
3967 |
|
|
we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
|
3968 |
|
|
true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
|
3969 |
|
|
is not worth testing for with no SUBREG). */
|
3970 |
|
|
|
3971 |
|
|
/* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE. */
|
3972 |
|
|
if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
|
3973 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
|
3974 |
|
|
> GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))))
|
3975 |
|
|
{
|
3976 |
|
|
enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
|
3977 |
|
|
rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op1);
|
3978 |
|
|
if (tem)
|
3979 |
|
|
record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0), tem,
|
3980 |
|
|
reversed_nonequality);
|
3981 |
|
|
}
|
3982 |
|
|
|
3983 |
|
|
if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
|
3984 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op1))
|
3985 |
|
|
> GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1)))))
|
3986 |
|
|
{
|
3987 |
|
|
enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
|
3988 |
|
|
rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op0);
|
3989 |
|
|
if (tem)
|
3990 |
|
|
record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1), tem,
|
3991 |
|
|
reversed_nonequality);
|
3992 |
|
|
}
|
3993 |
|
|
|
3994 |
|
|
/* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
|
3995 |
|
|
making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE. */
|
3996 |
|
|
|
3997 |
|
|
/* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE;
|
3998 |
|
|
if we test MODE instead, we can get an infinite recursion
|
3999 |
|
|
alternating between two modes each wider than MODE. */
|
4000 |
|
|
|
4001 |
|
|
if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
|
4002 |
|
|
&& subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
|
4003 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0))
|
4004 |
|
|
< GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))))
|
4005 |
|
|
{
|
4006 |
|
|
enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
|
4007 |
|
|
rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op1);
|
4008 |
|
|
if (tem)
|
4009 |
|
|
record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0), tem,
|
4010 |
|
|
reversed_nonequality);
|
4011 |
|
|
}
|
4012 |
|
|
|
4013 |
|
|
if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
|
4014 |
|
|
&& subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
|
4015 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op1))
|
4016 |
|
|
< GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1)))))
|
4017 |
|
|
{
|
4018 |
|
|
enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
|
4019 |
|
|
rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op0);
|
4020 |
|
|
if (tem)
|
4021 |
|
|
record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1), tem,
|
4022 |
|
|
reversed_nonequality);
|
4023 |
|
|
}
|
4024 |
|
|
|
4025 |
|
|
/* Hash both operands. */
|
4026 |
|
|
|
4027 |
|
|
do_not_record = 0;
|
4028 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
|
4029 |
|
|
op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
|
4030 |
|
|
op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
|
4031 |
|
|
|
4032 |
|
|
if (do_not_record)
|
4033 |
|
|
return;
|
4034 |
|
|
|
4035 |
|
|
do_not_record = 0;
|
4036 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
|
4037 |
|
|
op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
|
4038 |
|
|
op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
|
4039 |
|
|
|
4040 |
|
|
if (do_not_record)
|
4041 |
|
|
return;
|
4042 |
|
|
|
4043 |
|
|
/* Look up both operands. */
|
4044 |
|
|
op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash, mode);
|
4045 |
|
|
op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
|
4046 |
|
|
|
4047 |
|
|
/* If both operands are already equivalent or if they are not in the
|
4048 |
|
|
table but are identical, do nothing. */
|
4049 |
|
|
if ((op0_elt != 0 && op1_elt != 0
|
4050 |
|
|
&& op0_elt->first_same_value == op1_elt->first_same_value)
|
4051 |
|
|
|| op0 == op1 || rtx_equal_p (op0, op1))
|
4052 |
|
|
return;
|
4053 |
|
|
|
4054 |
|
|
/* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
|
4055 |
|
|
comparison. Similarly if this is floating-point. In the latter
|
4056 |
|
|
case, OP1 might be zero and both -0.0 and 0.0 are equal to it.
|
4057 |
|
|
If we record the equality, we might inadvertently delete code
|
4058 |
|
|
whose intent was to change -0 to +0. */
|
4059 |
|
|
|
4060 |
|
|
if (code != EQ || FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0)))
|
4061 |
|
|
{
|
4062 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *ent;
|
4063 |
|
|
int qty;
|
4064 |
|
|
|
4065 |
|
|
/* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
|
4066 |
|
|
register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
|
4067 |
|
|
do anything. */
|
4068 |
|
|
|
4069 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (op1))
|
4070 |
|
|
op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
|
4071 |
|
|
|
4072 |
|
|
if ((reversed_nonequality && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
|
4073 |
|
|
|| !REG_P (op0) || op1 == 0)
|
4074 |
|
|
return;
|
4075 |
|
|
|
4076 |
|
|
/* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already. This gives it a
|
4077 |
|
|
new quantity number. */
|
4078 |
|
|
if (op0_elt == 0)
|
4079 |
|
|
{
|
4080 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (op0, NULL, 0))
|
4081 |
|
|
{
|
4082 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (op0);
|
4083 |
|
|
op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
|
4084 |
|
|
|
4085 |
|
|
/* If OP0 is contained in OP1, this changes its hash code
|
4086 |
|
|
as well. Faster to rehash than to check, except
|
4087 |
|
|
for the simple case of a constant. */
|
4088 |
|
|
if (! CONSTANT_P (op1))
|
4089 |
|
|
op1_hash = HASH (op1,mode);
|
4090 |
|
|
}
|
4091 |
|
|
|
4092 |
|
|
op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL, op0_hash, mode);
|
4093 |
|
|
op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
|
4094 |
|
|
}
|
4095 |
|
|
|
4096 |
|
|
qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (op0));
|
4097 |
|
|
ent = &qty_table[qty];
|
4098 |
|
|
|
4099 |
|
|
ent->comparison_code = code;
|
4100 |
|
|
if (REG_P (op1))
|
4101 |
|
|
{
|
4102 |
|
|
/* Look it up again--in case op0 and op1 are the same. */
|
4103 |
|
|
op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
|
4104 |
|
|
|
4105 |
|
|
/* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number. */
|
4106 |
|
|
if (op1_elt == 0)
|
4107 |
|
|
{
|
4108 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (op1, NULL, 0))
|
4109 |
|
|
{
|
4110 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (op1);
|
4111 |
|
|
op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
|
4112 |
|
|
}
|
4113 |
|
|
|
4114 |
|
|
op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL, op1_hash, mode);
|
4115 |
|
|
op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
|
4116 |
|
|
}
|
4117 |
|
|
|
4118 |
|
|
ent->comparison_const = NULL_RTX;
|
4119 |
|
|
ent->comparison_qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (op1));
|
4120 |
|
|
}
|
4121 |
|
|
else
|
4122 |
|
|
{
|
4123 |
|
|
ent->comparison_const = op1;
|
4124 |
|
|
ent->comparison_qty = -1;
|
4125 |
|
|
}
|
4126 |
|
|
|
4127 |
|
|
return;
|
4128 |
|
|
}
|
4129 |
|
|
|
4130 |
|
|
/* If either side is still missing an equivalence, make it now,
|
4131 |
|
|
then merge the equivalences. */
|
4132 |
|
|
|
4133 |
|
|
if (op0_elt == 0)
|
4134 |
|
|
{
|
4135 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (op0, NULL, 0))
|
4136 |
|
|
{
|
4137 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (op0);
|
4138 |
|
|
op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
|
4139 |
|
|
}
|
4140 |
|
|
|
4141 |
|
|
op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL, op0_hash, mode);
|
4142 |
|
|
op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
|
4143 |
|
|
}
|
4144 |
|
|
|
4145 |
|
|
if (op1_elt == 0)
|
4146 |
|
|
{
|
4147 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (op1, NULL, 0))
|
4148 |
|
|
{
|
4149 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (op1);
|
4150 |
|
|
op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
|
4151 |
|
|
}
|
4152 |
|
|
|
4153 |
|
|
op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL, op1_hash, mode);
|
4154 |
|
|
op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
|
4155 |
|
|
}
|
4156 |
|
|
|
4157 |
|
|
merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
|
4158 |
|
|
}
|
4159 |
|
|
|
4160 |
|
|
/* CSE processing for one instruction.
|
4161 |
|
|
First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
|
4162 |
|
|
in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
|
4163 |
|
|
Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
|
4164 |
|
|
of available values. */
|
4165 |
|
|
|
4166 |
|
|
/* Data on one SET contained in the instruction. */
|
4167 |
|
|
|
4168 |
|
|
struct set
|
4169 |
|
|
{
|
4170 |
|
|
/* The SET rtx itself. */
|
4171 |
|
|
rtx rtl;
|
4172 |
|
|
/* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing). */
|
4173 |
|
|
rtx src;
|
4174 |
|
|
/* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET. */
|
4175 |
|
|
struct table_elt *src_elt;
|
4176 |
|
|
/* Hash value for the SET_SRC. */
|
4177 |
|
|
unsigned src_hash;
|
4178 |
|
|
/* Hash value for the SET_DEST. */
|
4179 |
|
|
unsigned dest_hash;
|
4180 |
|
|
/* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped. */
|
4181 |
|
|
rtx inner_dest;
|
4182 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory. */
|
4183 |
|
|
char src_in_memory;
|
4184 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
|
4185 |
|
|
whose value cannot be predicted and understood. */
|
4186 |
|
|
char src_volatile;
|
4187 |
|
|
/* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT.
|
4188 |
|
|
The size of this field should match the size of the mode
|
4189 |
|
|
field of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h). */
|
4190 |
|
|
ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
|
4191 |
|
|
/* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
|
4192 |
|
|
rtx src_const;
|
4193 |
|
|
/* Hash value of constant equivalent for SET_SRC. */
|
4194 |
|
|
unsigned src_const_hash;
|
4195 |
|
|
/* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
|
4196 |
|
|
struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
|
4197 |
|
|
/* Table entry for the destination address. */
|
4198 |
|
|
struct table_elt *dest_addr_elt;
|
4199 |
|
|
};
|
4200 |
|
|
|
4201 |
|
|
static void
|
4202 |
|
|
cse_insn (rtx insn)
|
4203 |
|
|
{
|
4204 |
|
|
rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
|
4205 |
|
|
int i;
|
4206 |
|
|
rtx tem;
|
4207 |
|
|
int n_sets = 0;
|
4208 |
|
|
|
4209 |
|
|
rtx src_eqv = 0;
|
4210 |
|
|
struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
|
4211 |
|
|
int src_eqv_volatile = 0;
|
4212 |
|
|
int src_eqv_in_memory = 0;
|
4213 |
|
|
unsigned src_eqv_hash = 0;
|
4214 |
|
|
|
4215 |
|
|
struct set *sets = (struct set *) 0;
|
4216 |
|
|
|
4217 |
|
|
this_insn = insn;
|
4218 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
4219 |
|
|
/* Records what this insn does to set CC0. */
|
4220 |
|
|
this_insn_cc0 = 0;
|
4221 |
|
|
this_insn_cc0_mode = VOIDmode;
|
4222 |
|
|
#endif
|
4223 |
|
|
|
4224 |
|
|
/* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
|
4225 |
|
|
Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
|
4226 |
|
|
Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
|
4227 |
|
|
all memory references, or all references at varying addresses. */
|
4228 |
|
|
|
4229 |
|
|
if (CALL_P (insn))
|
4230 |
|
|
{
|
4231 |
|
|
for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
|
4232 |
|
|
{
|
4233 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CLOBBER)
|
4234 |
|
|
invalidate (SET_DEST (XEXP (tem, 0)), VOIDmode);
|
4235 |
|
|
XEXP (tem, 0) = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
|
4236 |
|
|
}
|
4237 |
|
|
}
|
4238 |
|
|
|
4239 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
|
4240 |
|
|
{
|
4241 |
|
|
sets = XALLOCA (struct set);
|
4242 |
|
|
sets[0].rtl = x;
|
4243 |
|
|
|
4244 |
|
|
/* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
|
4245 |
|
|
They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
|
4246 |
|
|
The reason is not efficiency but rather
|
4247 |
|
|
so that we can test at the end for instructions
|
4248 |
|
|
that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
|
4249 |
|
|
and not be misled by unchanged instructions
|
4250 |
|
|
that were unconditional jumps to begin with. */
|
4251 |
|
|
if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
|
4252 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
|
4253 |
|
|
;
|
4254 |
|
|
|
4255 |
|
|
/* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
|
4256 |
|
|
The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
|
4257 |
|
|
someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
|
4258 |
|
|
Ensure we invalidate the destination register. On the 80386 no
|
4259 |
|
|
other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg.
|
4260 |
|
|
We need not check the return of apply_change_group; see canon_reg. */
|
4261 |
|
|
|
4262 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
|
4263 |
|
|
{
|
4264 |
|
|
canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
|
4265 |
|
|
apply_change_group ();
|
4266 |
|
|
fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
|
4267 |
|
|
invalidate (SET_DEST (x), VOIDmode);
|
4268 |
|
|
}
|
4269 |
|
|
else
|
4270 |
|
|
n_sets = 1;
|
4271 |
|
|
}
|
4272 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
|
4273 |
|
|
{
|
4274 |
|
|
int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
|
4275 |
|
|
|
4276 |
|
|
sets = XALLOCAVEC (struct set, lim);
|
4277 |
|
|
|
4278 |
|
|
/* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
|
4279 |
|
|
and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
|
4280 |
|
|
elsewhere in this insn.
|
4281 |
|
|
When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
|
4282 |
|
|
we should presume that that is for a reason,
|
4283 |
|
|
and we should not substitute some other register
|
4284 |
|
|
which is not supposed to be clobbered.
|
4285 |
|
|
Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
|
4286 |
|
|
because a CALL may precede a CLOBBER and refer to the
|
4287 |
|
|
value clobbered. We must not let a canonicalization do
|
4288 |
|
|
anything in that case. */
|
4289 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
|
4290 |
|
|
{
|
4291 |
|
|
rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
|
4292 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
|
4293 |
|
|
{
|
4294 |
|
|
rtx clobbered = XEXP (y, 0);
|
4295 |
|
|
|
4296 |
|
|
if (REG_P (clobbered)
|
4297 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (clobbered) == SUBREG)
|
4298 |
|
|
invalidate (clobbered, VOIDmode);
|
4299 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (clobbered) == STRICT_LOW_PART
|
4300 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (clobbered) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
4301 |
|
|
invalidate (XEXP (clobbered, 0), GET_MODE (clobbered));
|
4302 |
|
|
}
|
4303 |
|
|
}
|
4304 |
|
|
|
4305 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
|
4306 |
|
|
{
|
4307 |
|
|
rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
|
4308 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
|
4309 |
|
|
{
|
4310 |
|
|
/* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns and
|
4311 |
|
|
ignore the result of apply_change_group. */
|
4312 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
|
4313 |
|
|
{
|
4314 |
|
|
canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
|
4315 |
|
|
apply_change_group ();
|
4316 |
|
|
fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
|
4317 |
|
|
invalidate (SET_DEST (y), VOIDmode);
|
4318 |
|
|
}
|
4319 |
|
|
else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
|
4320 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
|
4321 |
|
|
;
|
4322 |
|
|
else
|
4323 |
|
|
sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
|
4324 |
|
|
}
|
4325 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
|
4326 |
|
|
{
|
4327 |
|
|
/* If we clobber memory, canon the address.
|
4328 |
|
|
This does nothing when a register is clobbered
|
4329 |
|
|
because we have already invalidated the reg. */
|
4330 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (XEXP (y, 0)))
|
4331 |
|
|
canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), insn);
|
4332 |
|
|
}
|
4333 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
|
4334 |
|
|
&& ! (REG_P (XEXP (y, 0))
|
4335 |
|
|
&& REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
|
4336 |
|
|
canon_reg (y, insn);
|
4337 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
|
4338 |
|
|
{
|
4339 |
|
|
/* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
|
4340 |
|
|
canon_reg. */
|
4341 |
|
|
canon_reg (y, insn);
|
4342 |
|
|
apply_change_group ();
|
4343 |
|
|
fold_rtx (y, insn);
|
4344 |
|
|
}
|
4345 |
|
|
}
|
4346 |
|
|
}
|
4347 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
|
4348 |
|
|
{
|
4349 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
|
4350 |
|
|
canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), insn);
|
4351 |
|
|
}
|
4352 |
|
|
|
4353 |
|
|
/* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location. */
|
4354 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
|
4355 |
|
|
&& ! (REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
|
4356 |
|
|
&& REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
|
4357 |
|
|
canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), insn);
|
4358 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
|
4359 |
|
|
{
|
4360 |
|
|
/* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
|
4361 |
|
|
canon_reg (x, insn);
|
4362 |
|
|
apply_change_group ();
|
4363 |
|
|
fold_rtx (x, insn);
|
4364 |
|
|
}
|
4365 |
|
|
else if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
|
4366 |
|
|
canon_reg (PATTERN (insn), insn);
|
4367 |
|
|
|
4368 |
|
|
/* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different, or if the DEST
|
4369 |
|
|
is a STRICT_LOW_PART. The latter condition is necessary because SRC_EQV
|
4370 |
|
|
is handled specially for this case, and if it isn't set, then there will
|
4371 |
|
|
be no equivalence for the destination. */
|
4372 |
|
|
if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0
|
4373 |
|
|
&& (tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) != 0
|
4374 |
|
|
&& (! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
|
4375 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART))
|
4376 |
|
|
{
|
4377 |
|
|
/* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
|
4378 |
|
|
canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
|
4379 |
|
|
apply_change_group ();
|
4380 |
|
|
src_eqv = fold_rtx (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
|
4381 |
|
|
XEXP (tem, 0) = copy_rtx (src_eqv);
|
4382 |
|
|
df_notes_rescan (insn);
|
4383 |
|
|
}
|
4384 |
|
|
|
4385 |
|
|
/* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
|
4386 |
|
|
We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
|
4387 |
|
|
present in the insn pattern. In that case, we want to ensure that
|
4388 |
|
|
we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern. So we will replace
|
4389 |
|
|
both operands at the same time. Otherwise, we would fail to find an
|
4390 |
|
|
equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
|
4391 |
|
|
|
4392 |
|
|
We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
|
4393 |
|
|
but we don't do this any more. */
|
4394 |
|
|
|
4395 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
|
4396 |
|
|
{
|
4397 |
|
|
rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
|
4398 |
|
|
rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
|
4399 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (src, insn);
|
4400 |
|
|
|
4401 |
|
|
validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_rtx, 1);
|
4402 |
|
|
|
4403 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
4404 |
|
|
{
|
4405 |
|
|
validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
|
4406 |
|
|
canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 1);
|
4407 |
|
|
validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
|
4408 |
|
|
canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 1);
|
4409 |
|
|
}
|
4410 |
|
|
|
4411 |
|
|
while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
|
4412 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
|
4413 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
4414 |
|
|
dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
|
4415 |
|
|
|
4416 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (dest))
|
4417 |
|
|
canon_reg (dest, insn);
|
4418 |
|
|
}
|
4419 |
|
|
|
4420 |
|
|
/* Now that we have done all the replacements, we can apply the change
|
4421 |
|
|
group and see if they all work. Note that this will cause some
|
4422 |
|
|
canonicalizations that would have worked individually not to be applied
|
4423 |
|
|
because some other canonicalization didn't work, but this should not
|
4424 |
|
|
occur often.
|
4425 |
|
|
|
4426 |
|
|
The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg. */
|
4427 |
|
|
|
4428 |
|
|
apply_change_group ();
|
4429 |
|
|
|
4430 |
|
|
/* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
|
4431 |
|
|
Detect assignments from or to volatile things
|
4432 |
|
|
and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
|
4433 |
|
|
in the rest of this function.
|
4434 |
|
|
|
4435 |
|
|
Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains. */
|
4436 |
|
|
|
4437 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
|
4438 |
|
|
{
|
4439 |
|
|
bool repeat = false;
|
4440 |
|
|
rtx src, dest;
|
4441 |
|
|
rtx src_folded;
|
4442 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
|
4443 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode;
|
4444 |
|
|
rtx src_eqv_here;
|
4445 |
|
|
rtx src_const = 0;
|
4446 |
|
|
rtx src_related = 0;
|
4447 |
|
|
bool src_related_is_const_anchor = false;
|
4448 |
|
|
struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
|
4449 |
|
|
int src_cost = MAX_COST;
|
4450 |
|
|
int src_eqv_cost = MAX_COST;
|
4451 |
|
|
int src_folded_cost = MAX_COST;
|
4452 |
|
|
int src_related_cost = MAX_COST;
|
4453 |
|
|
int src_elt_cost = MAX_COST;
|
4454 |
|
|
int src_regcost = MAX_COST;
|
4455 |
|
|
int src_eqv_regcost = MAX_COST;
|
4456 |
|
|
int src_folded_regcost = MAX_COST;
|
4457 |
|
|
int src_related_regcost = MAX_COST;
|
4458 |
|
|
int src_elt_regcost = MAX_COST;
|
4459 |
|
|
/* Set nonzero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
|
4460 |
|
|
contents of src_folded before using it. */
|
4461 |
|
|
int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
|
4462 |
|
|
|
4463 |
|
|
dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
|
4464 |
|
|
src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
|
4465 |
|
|
|
4466 |
|
|
/* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
|
4467 |
|
|
hash it with the destination's machine mode.
|
4468 |
|
|
This way we can keep different modes separate. */
|
4469 |
|
|
|
4470 |
|
|
mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
|
4471 |
|
|
sets[i].mode = mode;
|
4472 |
|
|
|
4473 |
|
|
if (src_eqv)
|
4474 |
|
|
{
|
4475 |
|
|
enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
|
4476 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
4477 |
|
|
eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
|
4478 |
|
|
do_not_record = 0;
|
4479 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
|
4480 |
|
|
src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
|
4481 |
|
|
|
4482 |
|
|
/* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression. */
|
4483 |
|
|
|
4484 |
|
|
if (!do_not_record)
|
4485 |
|
|
src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
|
4486 |
|
|
|
4487 |
|
|
src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
|
4488 |
|
|
src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
|
4489 |
|
|
}
|
4490 |
|
|
|
4491 |
|
|
/* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
|
4492 |
|
|
value of the INNER register, not the destination. So it is not
|
4493 |
|
|
a valid substitution for the source. But save it for later. */
|
4494 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
4495 |
|
|
src_eqv_here = 0;
|
4496 |
|
|
else
|
4497 |
|
|
src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
|
4498 |
|
|
|
4499 |
|
|
/* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC. Then get the fully-
|
4500 |
|
|
simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid. */
|
4501 |
|
|
src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
|
4502 |
|
|
|
4503 |
|
|
#if 0
|
4504 |
|
|
/* ??? This caused bad code to be generated for the m68k port with -O2.
|
4505 |
|
|
Suppose src is (CONST_INT -1), and that after truncation src_folded
|
4506 |
|
|
is (CONST_INT 3). Suppose src_folded is then used for src_const.
|
4507 |
|
|
At the end we will add src and src_const to the same equivalence
|
4508 |
|
|
class. We now have 3 and -1 on the same equivalence class. This
|
4509 |
|
|
causes later instructions to be mis-optimized. */
|
4510 |
|
|
/* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
|
4511 |
|
|
so we will be able to record it later. */
|
4512 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
4513 |
|
|
{
|
4514 |
|
|
rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
|
4515 |
|
|
|
4516 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (src)
|
4517 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (width)
|
4518 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
4519 |
|
|
&& (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
|
4520 |
|
|
src_folded
|
4521 |
|
|
= GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) & (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
|
4522 |
|
|
<< INTVAL (width)) - 1));
|
4523 |
|
|
}
|
4524 |
|
|
#endif
|
4525 |
|
|
|
4526 |
|
|
/* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
|
4527 |
|
|
should not be recorded at all. In that case,
|
4528 |
|
|
prevent any further processing of this assignment. */
|
4529 |
|
|
do_not_record = 0;
|
4530 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
|
4531 |
|
|
|
4532 |
|
|
sets[i].src = src;
|
4533 |
|
|
sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
|
4534 |
|
|
sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
|
4535 |
|
|
sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
|
4536 |
|
|
|
4537 |
|
|
/* If SRC is a MEM, there is a REG_EQUIV note for SRC, and DEST is
|
4538 |
|
|
a pseudo, do not record SRC. Using SRC as a replacement for
|
4539 |
|
|
anything else will be incorrect in that situation. Note that
|
4540 |
|
|
this usually occurs only for stack slots, in which case all the
|
4541 |
|
|
RTL would be referring to SRC, so we don't lose any optimization
|
4542 |
|
|
opportunities by not having SRC in the hash table. */
|
4543 |
|
|
|
4544 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (src)
|
4545 |
|
|
&& find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX) != 0
|
4546 |
|
|
&& REG_P (dest)
|
4547 |
|
|
&& REGNO (dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
4548 |
|
|
sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
|
4549 |
|
|
|
4550 |
|
|
#if 0
|
4551 |
|
|
/* It is no longer clear why we used to do this, but it doesn't
|
4552 |
|
|
appear to still be needed. So let's try without it since this
|
4553 |
|
|
code hurts cse'ing widened ops. */
|
4554 |
|
|
/* If source is a paradoxical subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
|
4555 |
|
|
treat it as volatile. It may do the work of an SI in one context
|
4556 |
|
|
where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
|
4557 |
|
|
in general. */
|
4558 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
|
4559 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
|
4560 |
|
|
> GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
|
4561 |
|
|
sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
|
4562 |
|
|
#endif
|
4563 |
|
|
|
4564 |
|
|
/* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC. Try to replace
|
4565 |
|
|
SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
|
4566 |
|
|
|
4567 |
|
|
We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
|
4568 |
|
|
version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
|
4569 |
|
|
to a constant.
|
4570 |
|
|
|
4571 |
|
|
Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
|
4572 |
|
|
of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
|
4573 |
|
|
the same class; we check for this).
|
4574 |
|
|
|
4575 |
|
|
If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
|
4576 |
|
|
|
4577 |
|
|
We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
|
4578 |
|
|
REG_NOTE. */
|
4579 |
|
|
|
4580 |
|
|
if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
|
4581 |
|
|
elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
|
4582 |
|
|
|
4583 |
|
|
sets[i].src_elt = elt;
|
4584 |
|
|
|
4585 |
|
|
if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
|
4586 |
|
|
{
|
4587 |
|
|
if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
|
4588 |
|
|
{
|
4589 |
|
|
/* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
|
4590 |
|
|
classes are now equivalent. So merge them. */
|
4591 |
|
|
merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
|
4592 |
|
|
src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
|
4593 |
|
|
src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, elt->mode);
|
4594 |
|
|
}
|
4595 |
|
|
|
4596 |
|
|
src_eqv_here = 0;
|
4597 |
|
|
}
|
4598 |
|
|
|
4599 |
|
|
else if (src_eqv_elt)
|
4600 |
|
|
elt = src_eqv_elt;
|
4601 |
|
|
|
4602 |
|
|
/* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
|
4603 |
|
|
Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'. Look in
|
4604 |
|
|
any known equivalences first. (If the constant is not in the
|
4605 |
|
|
table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash'). */
|
4606 |
|
|
if (elt)
|
4607 |
|
|
for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
|
4608 |
|
|
if (p->is_const)
|
4609 |
|
|
{
|
4610 |
|
|
src_const = p->exp;
|
4611 |
|
|
src_const_elt = elt;
|
4612 |
|
|
break;
|
4613 |
|
|
}
|
4614 |
|
|
|
4615 |
|
|
if (src_const == 0
|
4616 |
|
|
&& (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
|
4617 |
|
|
/* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
|
4618 |
|
|
"constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
|
4619 |
|
|
to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used. */
|
4620 |
|
|
|| (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
|
4621 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
|
4622 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
|
4623 |
|
|
src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
|
4624 |
|
|
else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
|
4625 |
|
|
src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
|
4626 |
|
|
|
4627 |
|
|
/* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
|
4628 |
|
|
hash code and look it up. */
|
4629 |
|
|
if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
|
4630 |
|
|
{
|
4631 |
|
|
sets[i].src_const_hash = HASH (src_const, mode);
|
4632 |
|
|
src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
|
4633 |
|
|
}
|
4634 |
|
|
|
4635 |
|
|
sets[i].src_const = src_const;
|
4636 |
|
|
sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
|
4637 |
|
|
|
4638 |
|
|
/* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
|
4639 |
|
|
equivalent. Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
|
4640 |
|
|
isn't, set ELT to it. */
|
4641 |
|
|
if (src_const_elt && elt
|
4642 |
|
|
&& src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
|
4643 |
|
|
merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
|
4644 |
|
|
else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
|
4645 |
|
|
elt = src_const_elt;
|
4646 |
|
|
|
4647 |
|
|
/* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
|
4648 |
|
|
equivalent of SRC. */
|
4649 |
|
|
if (src_const
|
4650 |
|
|
&& (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
|
4651 |
|
|
|| (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
|
4652 |
|
|
{
|
4653 |
|
|
src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
|
4654 |
|
|
if (src_related)
|
4655 |
|
|
{
|
4656 |
|
|
struct table_elt *src_related_elt
|
4657 |
|
|
= lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
|
4658 |
|
|
if (src_related_elt && elt)
|
4659 |
|
|
{
|
4660 |
|
|
if (elt->first_same_value
|
4661 |
|
|
!= src_related_elt->first_same_value)
|
4662 |
|
|
/* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
|
4663 |
|
|
involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
|
4664 |
|
|
twice. Merge the involved classes. */
|
4665 |
|
|
merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
|
4666 |
|
|
|
4667 |
|
|
src_related = 0;
|
4668 |
|
|
src_related_elt = 0;
|
4669 |
|
|
}
|
4670 |
|
|
else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
|
4671 |
|
|
elt = src_related_elt;
|
4672 |
|
|
}
|
4673 |
|
|
}
|
4674 |
|
|
|
4675 |
|
|
/* See if we have a CONST_INT that is already in a register in a
|
4676 |
|
|
wider mode. */
|
4677 |
|
|
|
4678 |
|
|
if (src_const && src_related == 0 && CONST_INT_P (src_const)
|
4679 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
|
4680 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
|
4681 |
|
|
{
|
4682 |
|
|
enum machine_mode wider_mode;
|
4683 |
|
|
|
4684 |
|
|
for (wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
|
4685 |
|
|
wider_mode != VOIDmode
|
4686 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wider_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD
|
4687 |
|
|
&& src_related == 0;
|
4688 |
|
|
wider_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode))
|
4689 |
|
|
{
|
4690 |
|
|
struct table_elt *const_elt
|
4691 |
|
|
= lookup (src_const, HASH (src_const, wider_mode), wider_mode);
|
4692 |
|
|
|
4693 |
|
|
if (const_elt == 0)
|
4694 |
|
|
continue;
|
4695 |
|
|
|
4696 |
|
|
for (const_elt = const_elt->first_same_value;
|
4697 |
|
|
const_elt; const_elt = const_elt->next_same_value)
|
4698 |
|
|
if (REG_P (const_elt->exp))
|
4699 |
|
|
{
|
4700 |
|
|
src_related = gen_lowpart (mode, const_elt->exp);
|
4701 |
|
|
break;
|
4702 |
|
|
}
|
4703 |
|
|
}
|
4704 |
|
|
}
|
4705 |
|
|
|
4706 |
|
|
/* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
|
4707 |
|
|
a mode narrower than a word. If so, it might have been generated
|
4708 |
|
|
as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND. If we already
|
4709 |
|
|
have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
|
4710 |
|
|
value. */
|
4711 |
|
|
|
4712 |
|
|
if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
|
4713 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (src) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1))
|
4714 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
|
4715 |
|
|
{
|
4716 |
|
|
enum machine_mode tmode;
|
4717 |
|
|
rtx new_and = gen_rtx_AND (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, XEXP (src, 1));
|
4718 |
|
|
|
4719 |
|
|
for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
|
4720 |
|
|
GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
|
4721 |
|
|
tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
|
4722 |
|
|
{
|
4723 |
|
|
rtx inner = gen_lowpart (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
|
4724 |
|
|
struct table_elt *larger_elt;
|
4725 |
|
|
|
4726 |
|
|
if (inner)
|
4727 |
|
|
{
|
4728 |
|
|
PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
|
4729 |
|
|
XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
|
4730 |
|
|
larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
|
4731 |
|
|
if (larger_elt == 0)
|
4732 |
|
|
continue;
|
4733 |
|
|
|
4734 |
|
|
for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
|
4735 |
|
|
larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
|
4736 |
|
|
if (REG_P (larger_elt->exp))
|
4737 |
|
|
{
|
4738 |
|
|
src_related
|
4739 |
|
|
= gen_lowpart (mode, larger_elt->exp);
|
4740 |
|
|
break;
|
4741 |
|
|
}
|
4742 |
|
|
|
4743 |
|
|
if (src_related)
|
4744 |
|
|
break;
|
4745 |
|
|
}
|
4746 |
|
|
}
|
4747 |
|
|
}
|
4748 |
|
|
|
4749 |
|
|
#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
|
4750 |
|
|
/* See if a MEM has already been loaded with a widening operation;
|
4751 |
|
|
if it has, we can use a subreg of that. Many CISC machines
|
4752 |
|
|
also have such operations, but this is only likely to be
|
4753 |
|
|
beneficial on these machines. */
|
4754 |
|
|
|
4755 |
|
|
if (flag_expensive_optimizations && src_related == 0
|
4756 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
|
4757 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
|
4758 |
|
|
&& MEM_P (src) && ! do_not_record
|
4759 |
|
|
&& LOAD_EXTEND_OP (mode) != UNKNOWN)
|
4760 |
|
|
{
|
4761 |
|
|
struct rtx_def memory_extend_buf;
|
4762 |
|
|
rtx memory_extend_rtx = &memory_extend_buf;
|
4763 |
|
|
enum machine_mode tmode;
|
4764 |
|
|
|
4765 |
|
|
/* Set what we are trying to extend and the operation it might
|
4766 |
|
|
have been extended with. */
|
4767 |
|
|
memset (memory_extend_rtx, 0, sizeof(*memory_extend_rtx));
|
4768 |
|
|
PUT_CODE (memory_extend_rtx, LOAD_EXTEND_OP (mode));
|
4769 |
|
|
XEXP (memory_extend_rtx, 0) = src;
|
4770 |
|
|
|
4771 |
|
|
for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
|
4772 |
|
|
GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
|
4773 |
|
|
tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
|
4774 |
|
|
{
|
4775 |
|
|
struct table_elt *larger_elt;
|
4776 |
|
|
|
4777 |
|
|
PUT_MODE (memory_extend_rtx, tmode);
|
4778 |
|
|
larger_elt = lookup (memory_extend_rtx,
|
4779 |
|
|
HASH (memory_extend_rtx, tmode), tmode);
|
4780 |
|
|
if (larger_elt == 0)
|
4781 |
|
|
continue;
|
4782 |
|
|
|
4783 |
|
|
for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
|
4784 |
|
|
larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
|
4785 |
|
|
if (REG_P (larger_elt->exp))
|
4786 |
|
|
{
|
4787 |
|
|
src_related = gen_lowpart (mode, larger_elt->exp);
|
4788 |
|
|
break;
|
4789 |
|
|
}
|
4790 |
|
|
|
4791 |
|
|
if (src_related)
|
4792 |
|
|
break;
|
4793 |
|
|
}
|
4794 |
|
|
}
|
4795 |
|
|
#endif /* LOAD_EXTEND_OP */
|
4796 |
|
|
|
4797 |
|
|
/* Try to express the constant using a register+offset expression
|
4798 |
|
|
derived from a constant anchor. */
|
4799 |
|
|
|
4800 |
|
|
if (targetm.const_anchor
|
4801 |
|
|
&& !src_related
|
4802 |
|
|
&& src_const
|
4803 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT)
|
4804 |
|
|
{
|
4805 |
|
|
src_related = try_const_anchors (src_const, mode);
|
4806 |
|
|
src_related_is_const_anchor = src_related != NULL_RTX;
|
4807 |
|
|
}
|
4808 |
|
|
|
4809 |
|
|
|
4810 |
|
|
if (src == src_folded)
|
4811 |
|
|
src_folded = 0;
|
4812 |
|
|
|
4813 |
|
|
/* At this point, ELT, if nonzero, points to a class of expressions
|
4814 |
|
|
equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
|
4815 |
|
|
and SRC_RELATED, if nonzero, each contain additional equivalent
|
4816 |
|
|
expressions. Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
|
4817 |
|
|
already in the equivalence class.
|
4818 |
|
|
|
4819 |
|
|
Check for an equivalent identical to the destination. If found,
|
4820 |
|
|
this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
|
4821 |
|
|
elimination of the insn. Indicate this by placing it in
|
4822 |
|
|
`src_related'. */
|
4823 |
|
|
|
4824 |
|
|
if (elt)
|
4825 |
|
|
elt = elt->first_same_value;
|
4826 |
|
|
for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
|
4827 |
|
|
{
|
4828 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
|
4829 |
|
|
|
4830 |
|
|
/* If the expression is not valid, ignore it. Then we do not
|
4831 |
|
|
have to check for validity below. In most cases, we can use
|
4832 |
|
|
`rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done. */
|
4833 |
|
|
if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
|
4834 |
|
|
continue;
|
4835 |
|
|
|
4836 |
|
|
/* Also skip paradoxical subregs, unless that's what we're
|
4837 |
|
|
looking for. */
|
4838 |
|
|
if (code == SUBREG
|
4839 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (p->exp))
|
4840 |
|
|
> GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (p->exp))))
|
4841 |
|
|
&& ! (src != 0
|
4842 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
|
4843 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (p->exp)
|
4844 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))
|
4845 |
|
|
< GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (p->exp))))))
|
4846 |
|
|
continue;
|
4847 |
|
|
|
4848 |
|
|
if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
|
4849 |
|
|
src = 0;
|
4850 |
|
|
else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
|
4851 |
|
|
&& rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
|
4852 |
|
|
src_folded = 0;
|
4853 |
|
|
else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
|
4854 |
|
|
&& rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
|
4855 |
|
|
src_eqv_here = 0;
|
4856 |
|
|
else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
|
4857 |
|
|
&& rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
|
4858 |
|
|
src_related = 0;
|
4859 |
|
|
|
4860 |
|
|
/* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
|
4861 |
|
|
to prefer it. Copy it to src_related. The code below will
|
4862 |
|
|
then give it a negative cost. */
|
4863 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
|
4864 |
|
|
src_related = dest;
|
4865 |
|
|
}
|
4866 |
|
|
|
4867 |
|
|
/* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
|
4868 |
|
|
possibilities. Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
|
4869 |
|
|
that are when they are equal cost. Note that we can never
|
4870 |
|
|
worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
|
4871 |
|
|
If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
|
4872 |
|
|
since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
|
4873 |
|
|
if (src)
|
4874 |
|
|
{
|
4875 |
|
|
if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
|
4876 |
|
|
src_cost = src_regcost = -1;
|
4877 |
|
|
else
|
4878 |
|
|
{
|
4879 |
|
|
src_cost = COST (src);
|
4880 |
|
|
src_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src);
|
4881 |
|
|
}
|
4882 |
|
|
}
|
4883 |
|
|
|
4884 |
|
|
if (src_eqv_here)
|
4885 |
|
|
{
|
4886 |
|
|
if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
|
4887 |
|
|
src_eqv_cost = src_eqv_regcost = -1;
|
4888 |
|
|
else
|
4889 |
|
|
{
|
4890 |
|
|
src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
|
4891 |
|
|
src_eqv_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_eqv_here);
|
4892 |
|
|
}
|
4893 |
|
|
}
|
4894 |
|
|
|
4895 |
|
|
if (src_folded)
|
4896 |
|
|
{
|
4897 |
|
|
if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
|
4898 |
|
|
src_folded_cost = src_folded_regcost = -1;
|
4899 |
|
|
else
|
4900 |
|
|
{
|
4901 |
|
|
src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
|
4902 |
|
|
src_folded_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_folded);
|
4903 |
|
|
}
|
4904 |
|
|
}
|
4905 |
|
|
|
4906 |
|
|
if (src_related)
|
4907 |
|
|
{
|
4908 |
|
|
if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
|
4909 |
|
|
src_related_cost = src_related_regcost = -1;
|
4910 |
|
|
else
|
4911 |
|
|
{
|
4912 |
|
|
src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
|
4913 |
|
|
src_related_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_related);
|
4914 |
|
|
|
4915 |
|
|
/* If a const-anchor is used to synthesize a constant that
|
4916 |
|
|
normally requires multiple instructions then slightly prefer
|
4917 |
|
|
it over the original sequence. These instructions are likely
|
4918 |
|
|
to become redundant now. We can't compare against the cost
|
4919 |
|
|
of src_eqv_here because, on MIPS for example, multi-insn
|
4920 |
|
|
constants have zero cost; they are assumed to be hoisted from
|
4921 |
|
|
loops. */
|
4922 |
|
|
if (src_related_is_const_anchor
|
4923 |
|
|
&& src_related_cost == src_cost
|
4924 |
|
|
&& src_eqv_here)
|
4925 |
|
|
src_related_cost--;
|
4926 |
|
|
}
|
4927 |
|
|
}
|
4928 |
|
|
|
4929 |
|
|
/* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
|
4930 |
|
|
cheaper even though it looks more expensive. */
|
4931 |
|
|
if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
|
4932 |
|
|
src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = src_folded_regcost = -1;
|
4933 |
|
|
|
4934 |
|
|
/* Terminate loop when replacement made. This must terminate since
|
4935 |
|
|
the current contents will be tested and will always be valid. */
|
4936 |
|
|
while (1)
|
4937 |
|
|
{
|
4938 |
|
|
rtx trial;
|
4939 |
|
|
|
4940 |
|
|
/* Skip invalid entries. */
|
4941 |
|
|
while (elt && !REG_P (elt->exp)
|
4942 |
|
|
&& ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
|
4943 |
|
|
elt = elt->next_same_value;
|
4944 |
|
|
|
4945 |
|
|
/* A paradoxical subreg would be bad here: it'll be the right
|
4946 |
|
|
size, but later may be adjusted so that the upper bits aren't
|
4947 |
|
|
what we want. So reject it. */
|
4948 |
|
|
if (elt != 0
|
4949 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (elt->exp) == SUBREG
|
4950 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (elt->exp))
|
4951 |
|
|
> GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp))))
|
4952 |
|
|
/* It is okay, though, if the rtx we're trying to match
|
4953 |
|
|
will ignore any of the bits we can't predict. */
|
4954 |
|
|
&& ! (src != 0
|
4955 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
|
4956 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (elt->exp)
|
4957 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))
|
4958 |
|
|
< GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp))))))
|
4959 |
|
|
{
|
4960 |
|
|
elt = elt->next_same_value;
|
4961 |
|
|
continue;
|
4962 |
|
|
}
|
4963 |
|
|
|
4964 |
|
|
if (elt)
|
4965 |
|
|
{
|
4966 |
|
|
src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
|
4967 |
|
|
src_elt_regcost = elt->regcost;
|
4968 |
|
|
}
|
4969 |
|
|
|
4970 |
|
|
/* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time. For items
|
4971 |
|
|
of equal cost, use this order:
|
4972 |
|
|
src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry. */
|
4973 |
|
|
if (src_folded
|
4974 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
|
4975 |
|
|
src_cost, src_regcost) <= 0
|
4976 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
|
4977 |
|
|
src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost) <= 0
|
4978 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
|
4979 |
|
|
src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
|
4980 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
|
4981 |
|
|
src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
|
4982 |
|
|
{
|
4983 |
|
|
trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = MAX_COST;
|
4984 |
|
|
if (src_folded_force_flag)
|
4985 |
|
|
{
|
4986 |
|
|
rtx forced = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
|
4987 |
|
|
if (forced)
|
4988 |
|
|
trial = forced;
|
4989 |
|
|
}
|
4990 |
|
|
}
|
4991 |
|
|
else if (src
|
4992 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
|
4993 |
|
|
src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost) <= 0
|
4994 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
|
4995 |
|
|
src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
|
4996 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
|
4997 |
|
|
src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
|
4998 |
|
|
trial = src, src_cost = MAX_COST;
|
4999 |
|
|
else if (src_eqv_here
|
5000 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost,
|
5001 |
|
|
src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
|
5002 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost,
|
5003 |
|
|
src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
|
5004 |
|
|
trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = MAX_COST;
|
5005 |
|
|
else if (src_related
|
5006 |
|
|
&& preferable (src_related_cost, src_related_regcost,
|
5007 |
|
|
src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
|
5008 |
|
|
trial = src_related, src_related_cost = MAX_COST;
|
5009 |
|
|
else
|
5010 |
|
|
{
|
5011 |
|
|
trial = elt->exp;
|
5012 |
|
|
elt = elt->next_same_value;
|
5013 |
|
|
src_elt_cost = MAX_COST;
|
5014 |
|
|
}
|
5015 |
|
|
|
5016 |
|
|
/* Avoid creation of overlapping memory moves. */
|
5017 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (trial) && MEM_P (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
|
5018 |
|
|
{
|
5019 |
|
|
rtx src, dest;
|
5020 |
|
|
|
5021 |
|
|
/* BLKmode moves are not handled by cse anyway. */
|
5022 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (trial) == BLKmode)
|
5023 |
|
|
break;
|
5024 |
|
|
|
5025 |
|
|
src = canon_rtx (trial);
|
5026 |
|
|
dest = canon_rtx (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
|
5027 |
|
|
|
5028 |
|
|
if (!MEM_P (src) || !MEM_P (dest)
|
5029 |
|
|
|| !nonoverlapping_memrefs_p (src, dest))
|
5030 |
|
|
break;
|
5031 |
|
|
}
|
5032 |
|
|
|
5033 |
|
|
/* Try to optimize
|
5034 |
|
|
(set (reg:M N) (const_int A))
|
5035 |
|
|
(set (reg:M2 O) (const_int B))
|
5036 |
|
|
(set (zero_extract:M2 (reg:M N) (const_int C) (const_int D))
|
5037 |
|
|
(reg:M2 O)). */
|
5038 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
|
5039 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (trial)
|
5040 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))
|
5041 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2))
|
5042 |
|
|
&& REG_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 0))
|
5043 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
|
5044 |
|
|
>= INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1)))
|
5045 |
|
|
&& ((unsigned) INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))
|
5046 |
|
|
+ (unsigned) INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2))
|
5047 |
|
|
<= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT))
|
5048 |
|
|
{
|
5049 |
|
|
rtx dest_reg = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 0);
|
5050 |
|
|
rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
|
5051 |
|
|
rtx pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2);
|
5052 |
|
|
unsigned int dest_hash = HASH (dest_reg, GET_MODE (dest_reg));
|
5053 |
|
|
struct table_elt *dest_elt
|
5054 |
|
|
= lookup (dest_reg, dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest_reg));
|
5055 |
|
|
rtx dest_cst = NULL;
|
5056 |
|
|
|
5057 |
|
|
if (dest_elt)
|
5058 |
|
|
for (p = dest_elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
|
5059 |
|
|
if (p->is_const && CONST_INT_P (p->exp))
|
5060 |
|
|
{
|
5061 |
|
|
dest_cst = p->exp;
|
5062 |
|
|
break;
|
5063 |
|
|
}
|
5064 |
|
|
if (dest_cst)
|
5065 |
|
|
{
|
5066 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (dest_cst);
|
5067 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
|
5068 |
|
|
unsigned int shift;
|
5069 |
|
|
if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
|
5070 |
|
|
shift = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (dest_reg))
|
5071 |
|
|
- INTVAL (pos) - INTVAL (width);
|
5072 |
|
|
else
|
5073 |
|
|
shift = INTVAL (pos);
|
5074 |
|
|
if (INTVAL (width) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
5075 |
|
|
mask = ~(HOST_WIDE_INT) 0;
|
5076 |
|
|
else
|
5077 |
|
|
mask = ((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1;
|
5078 |
|
|
val &= ~(mask << shift);
|
5079 |
|
|
val |= (INTVAL (trial) & mask) << shift;
|
5080 |
|
|
val = trunc_int_for_mode (val, GET_MODE (dest_reg));
|
5081 |
|
|
validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl),
|
5082 |
|
|
dest_reg, 1);
|
5083 |
|
|
validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
|
5084 |
|
|
GEN_INT (val), 1);
|
5085 |
|
|
if (apply_change_group ())
|
5086 |
|
|
{
|
5087 |
|
|
rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
|
5088 |
|
|
if (note)
|
5089 |
|
|
{
|
5090 |
|
|
remove_note (insn, note);
|
5091 |
|
|
df_notes_rescan (insn);
|
5092 |
|
|
}
|
5093 |
|
|
src_eqv = NULL_RTX;
|
5094 |
|
|
src_eqv_elt = NULL;
|
5095 |
|
|
src_eqv_volatile = 0;
|
5096 |
|
|
src_eqv_in_memory = 0;
|
5097 |
|
|
src_eqv_hash = 0;
|
5098 |
|
|
repeat = true;
|
5099 |
|
|
break;
|
5100 |
|
|
}
|
5101 |
|
|
}
|
5102 |
|
|
}
|
5103 |
|
|
|
5104 |
|
|
/* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
|
5105 |
|
|
check for this separately here. We will delete such an
|
5106 |
|
|
insn below.
|
5107 |
|
|
|
5108 |
|
|
For other cases such as a table jump or conditional jump
|
5109 |
|
|
where we know the ultimate target, go ahead and replace the
|
5110 |
|
|
operand. While that may not make a valid insn, we will
|
5111 |
|
|
reemit the jump below (and also insert any necessary
|
5112 |
|
|
barriers). */
|
5113 |
|
|
if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
|
5114 |
|
|
&& (trial == pc_rtx
|
5115 |
|
|
|| (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
|
5116 |
|
|
&& ! condjump_p (insn))))
|
5117 |
|
|
{
|
5118 |
|
|
/* Don't substitute non-local labels, this confuses CFG. */
|
5119 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
|
5120 |
|
|
&& LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (trial))
|
5121 |
|
|
continue;
|
5122 |
|
|
|
5123 |
|
|
SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
|
5124 |
|
|
cse_jumps_altered = true;
|
5125 |
|
|
break;
|
5126 |
|
|
}
|
5127 |
|
|
|
5128 |
|
|
/* Reject certain invalid forms of CONST that we create. */
|
5129 |
|
|
else if (CONSTANT_P (trial)
|
5130 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (trial) == CONST
|
5131 |
|
|
/* Reject cases that will cause decode_rtx_const to
|
5132 |
|
|
die. On the alpha when simplifying a switch, we
|
5133 |
|
|
get (const (truncate (minus (label_ref)
|
5134 |
|
|
(label_ref)))). */
|
5135 |
|
|
&& (GET_CODE (XEXP (trial, 0)) == TRUNCATE
|
5136 |
|
|
/* Likewise on IA-64, except without the
|
5137 |
|
|
truncate. */
|
5138 |
|
|
|| (GET_CODE (XEXP (trial, 0)) == MINUS
|
5139 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (trial, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
|
5140 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (trial, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
|
5141 |
|
|
/* Do nothing for this case. */
|
5142 |
|
|
;
|
5143 |
|
|
|
5144 |
|
|
/* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn. */
|
5145 |
|
|
else if (validate_unshare_change
|
5146 |
|
|
(insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
|
5147 |
|
|
{
|
5148 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn);
|
5149 |
|
|
|
5150 |
|
|
/* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
|
5151 |
|
|
canon_reg. */
|
5152 |
|
|
|
5153 |
|
|
validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_rtx, 1);
|
5154 |
|
|
apply_change_group ();
|
5155 |
|
|
|
5156 |
|
|
break;
|
5157 |
|
|
}
|
5158 |
|
|
|
5159 |
|
|
/* If we previously found constant pool entries for
|
5160 |
|
|
constants and this is a constant, try making a
|
5161 |
|
|
pool entry. Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
|
5162 |
|
|
this since that is where it likely came from. */
|
5163 |
|
|
|
5164 |
|
|
else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
|
5165 |
|
|
&& CONSTANT_P (trial)
|
5166 |
|
|
&& (src_folded == 0
|
5167 |
|
|
|| (!MEM_P (src_folded)
|
5168 |
|
|
&& ! src_folded_force_flag))
|
5169 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC
|
5170 |
|
|
&& mode != VOIDmode)
|
5171 |
|
|
{
|
5172 |
|
|
src_folded_force_flag = 1;
|
5173 |
|
|
src_folded = trial;
|
5174 |
|
|
src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
|
5175 |
|
|
src_folded_regcost = constant_pool_entries_regcost;
|
5176 |
|
|
}
|
5177 |
|
|
}
|
5178 |
|
|
|
5179 |
|
|
/* If we changed the insn too much, handle this set from scratch. */
|
5180 |
|
|
if (repeat)
|
5181 |
|
|
{
|
5182 |
|
|
i--;
|
5183 |
|
|
continue;
|
5184 |
|
|
}
|
5185 |
|
|
|
5186 |
|
|
src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
|
5187 |
|
|
|
5188 |
|
|
/* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
|
5189 |
|
|
However, there is an important exception: If both are registers
|
5190 |
|
|
that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
|
5191 |
|
|
with the head of the class. If we do not do this, we will have
|
5192 |
|
|
both registers live over a portion of the basic block. This way,
|
5193 |
|
|
their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping. */
|
5194 |
|
|
if (REG_P (dest)
|
5195 |
|
|
&& REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest)))
|
5196 |
|
|
{
|
5197 |
|
|
int dest_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (dest));
|
5198 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *dest_ent = &qty_table[dest_q];
|
5199 |
|
|
|
5200 |
|
|
if (dest_ent->mode == GET_MODE (dest)
|
5201 |
|
|
&& dest_ent->first_reg != REGNO (dest)
|
5202 |
|
|
&& REG_P (src) && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
|
5203 |
|
|
/* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
|
5204 |
|
|
SET_SRC or SET_DEST. */
|
5205 |
|
|
&& (!REG_P (sets[i].src)
|
5206 |
|
|
|| REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
5207 |
|
|
&& (!REG_P (dest) || REGNO (dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
|
5208 |
|
|
/* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
|
5209 |
|
|
SRC is a hard register. */
|
5210 |
|
|
{
|
5211 |
|
|
int src_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (src));
|
5212 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *src_ent = &qty_table[src_q];
|
5213 |
|
|
int first = src_ent->first_reg;
|
5214 |
|
|
rtx new_src
|
5215 |
|
|
= (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
5216 |
|
|
? regno_reg_rtx[first] : gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (src), first));
|
5217 |
|
|
|
5218 |
|
|
/* We must use validate-change even for this, because this
|
5219 |
|
|
might be a special no-op instruction, suitable only to
|
5220 |
|
|
tag notes onto. */
|
5221 |
|
|
if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_src, 0))
|
5222 |
|
|
{
|
5223 |
|
|
src = new_src;
|
5224 |
|
|
/* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
|
5225 |
|
|
setting SRC to, use that constant. We ignored it when we
|
5226 |
|
|
thought we could make this into a no-op. */
|
5227 |
|
|
if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
|
5228 |
|
|
&& validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
|
5229 |
|
|
src_const, 0))
|
5230 |
|
|
src = src_const;
|
5231 |
|
|
}
|
5232 |
|
|
}
|
5233 |
|
|
}
|
5234 |
|
|
|
5235 |
|
|
/* If we made a change, recompute SRC values. */
|
5236 |
|
|
if (src != sets[i].src)
|
5237 |
|
|
{
|
5238 |
|
|
do_not_record = 0;
|
5239 |
|
|
hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
|
5240 |
|
|
sets[i].src = src;
|
5241 |
|
|
sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
|
5242 |
|
|
sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
|
5243 |
|
|
sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
|
5244 |
|
|
sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
|
5245 |
|
|
}
|
5246 |
|
|
|
5247 |
|
|
/* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
|
5248 |
|
|
equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE. We don't want
|
5249 |
|
|
to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
|
5250 |
|
|
that pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a pain. Such a note also
|
5251 |
|
|
won't help anything.
|
5252 |
|
|
|
5253 |
|
|
Avoid a REG_EQUAL note for (CONST (MINUS (LABEL_REF) (LABEL_REF)))
|
5254 |
|
|
which can be created for a reference to a compile time computable
|
5255 |
|
|
entry in a jump table. */
|
5256 |
|
|
|
5257 |
|
|
if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && REG_P (dest)
|
5258 |
|
|
&& !REG_P (src_const)
|
5259 |
|
|
&& ! (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
|
5260 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (src_const, 0)) == MINUS
|
5261 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src_const, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
|
5262 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src_const, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF))
|
5263 |
|
|
{
|
5264 |
|
|
/* We only want a REG_EQUAL note if src_const != src. */
|
5265 |
|
|
if (! rtx_equal_p (src, src_const))
|
5266 |
|
|
{
|
5267 |
|
|
/* Make sure that the rtx is not shared. */
|
5268 |
|
|
src_const = copy_rtx (src_const);
|
5269 |
|
|
|
5270 |
|
|
/* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note,
|
5271 |
|
|
making a new one if one does not already exist. */
|
5272 |
|
|
set_unique_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, src_const);
|
5273 |
|
|
df_notes_rescan (insn);
|
5274 |
|
|
}
|
5275 |
|
|
}
|
5276 |
|
|
|
5277 |
|
|
/* Now deal with the destination. */
|
5278 |
|
|
do_not_record = 0;
|
5279 |
|
|
|
5280 |
|
|
/* Look within any ZERO_EXTRACT to the MEM or REG within it. */
|
5281 |
|
|
while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
|
5282 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
|
5283 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
5284 |
|
|
dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
|
5285 |
|
|
|
5286 |
|
|
sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
|
5287 |
|
|
|
5288 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (dest))
|
5289 |
|
|
{
|
5290 |
|
|
#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
|
5291 |
|
|
/* Stack pushes invalidate the stack pointer. */
|
5292 |
|
|
rtx addr = XEXP (dest, 0);
|
5293 |
|
|
if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (addr)) == RTX_AUTOINC
|
5294 |
|
|
&& XEXP (addr, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx)
|
5295 |
|
|
invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx, VOIDmode);
|
5296 |
|
|
#endif
|
5297 |
|
|
dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
|
5298 |
|
|
}
|
5299 |
|
|
|
5300 |
|
|
/* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
|
5301 |
|
|
before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
|
5302 |
|
|
since the register values used in the address computation
|
5303 |
|
|
are those before this instruction. */
|
5304 |
|
|
sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, mode);
|
5305 |
|
|
|
5306 |
|
|
/* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
|
5307 |
|
|
because the value in it after the store
|
5308 |
|
|
may not equal what was stored, due to truncation. */
|
5309 |
|
|
|
5310 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
5311 |
|
|
{
|
5312 |
|
|
rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
|
5313 |
|
|
|
5314 |
|
|
if (src_const != 0 && CONST_INT_P (src_const)
|
5315 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (width)
|
5316 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
5317 |
|
|
&& ! (INTVAL (src_const)
|
5318 |
|
|
& ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
|
5319 |
|
|
/* Exception: if the value is constant,
|
5320 |
|
|
and it won't be truncated, record it. */
|
5321 |
|
|
;
|
5322 |
|
|
else
|
5323 |
|
|
{
|
5324 |
|
|
/* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
|
5325 |
|
|
but no new value will be recorded.
|
5326 |
|
|
We must invalidate because sometimes constant
|
5327 |
|
|
values can be recorded for bitfields. */
|
5328 |
|
|
sets[i].src_elt = 0;
|
5329 |
|
|
sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
|
5330 |
|
|
src_eqv = 0;
|
5331 |
|
|
src_eqv_elt = 0;
|
5332 |
|
|
}
|
5333 |
|
|
}
|
5334 |
|
|
|
5335 |
|
|
/* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
|
5336 |
|
|
the insn. */
|
5337 |
|
|
else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
|
5338 |
|
|
{
|
5339 |
|
|
/* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to. */
|
5340 |
|
|
delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
|
5341 |
|
|
cse_jumps_altered = true;
|
5342 |
|
|
/* No more processing for this set. */
|
5343 |
|
|
sets[i].rtl = 0;
|
5344 |
|
|
}
|
5345 |
|
|
|
5346 |
|
|
/* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
|
5347 |
|
|
be a conditional or computed branch. */
|
5348 |
|
|
else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF
|
5349 |
|
|
&& !LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (src))
|
5350 |
|
|
{
|
5351 |
|
|
/* We reemit the jump in as many cases as possible just in
|
5352 |
|
|
case the form of an unconditional jump is significantly
|
5353 |
|
|
different than a computed jump or conditional jump.
|
5354 |
|
|
|
5355 |
|
|
If this insn has multiple sets, then reemitting the
|
5356 |
|
|
jump is nontrivial. So instead we just force rerecognition
|
5357 |
|
|
and hope for the best. */
|
5358 |
|
|
if (n_sets == 1)
|
5359 |
|
|
{
|
5360 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx, note;
|
5361 |
|
|
|
5362 |
|
|
new_rtx = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
|
5363 |
|
|
JUMP_LABEL (new_rtx) = XEXP (src, 0);
|
5364 |
|
|
LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
|
5365 |
|
|
|
5366 |
|
|
/* Make sure to copy over REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO. */
|
5367 |
|
|
note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO, 0);
|
5368 |
|
|
if (note)
|
5369 |
|
|
{
|
5370 |
|
|
XEXP (note, 1) = NULL_RTX;
|
5371 |
|
|
REG_NOTES (new_rtx) = note;
|
5372 |
|
|
}
|
5373 |
|
|
|
5374 |
|
|
delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
|
5375 |
|
|
insn = new_rtx;
|
5376 |
|
|
}
|
5377 |
|
|
else
|
5378 |
|
|
INSN_CODE (insn) = -1;
|
5379 |
|
|
|
5380 |
|
|
/* Do not bother deleting any unreachable code, let jump do it. */
|
5381 |
|
|
cse_jumps_altered = true;
|
5382 |
|
|
sets[i].rtl = 0;
|
5383 |
|
|
}
|
5384 |
|
|
|
5385 |
|
|
/* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
|
5386 |
|
|
processing for this assignment. */
|
5387 |
|
|
|
5388 |
|
|
else if (do_not_record)
|
5389 |
|
|
{
|
5390 |
|
|
if (REG_P (dest) || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
|
5391 |
|
|
invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
|
5392 |
|
|
else if (MEM_P (dest))
|
5393 |
|
|
invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
|
5394 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
|
5395 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
5396 |
|
|
invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0), GET_MODE (dest));
|
5397 |
|
|
sets[i].rtl = 0;
|
5398 |
|
|
}
|
5399 |
|
|
|
5400 |
|
|
if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
|
5401 |
|
|
sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
|
5402 |
|
|
|
5403 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
5404 |
|
|
/* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
|
5405 |
|
|
is equivalent to a constant. If it is being set to a floating-point
|
5406 |
|
|
value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0. If we
|
5407 |
|
|
don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
|
5408 |
|
|
const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
|
5409 |
|
|
insn as a floating-point operand. */
|
5410 |
|
|
if (dest == cc0_rtx)
|
5411 |
|
|
{
|
5412 |
|
|
this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
|
5413 |
|
|
this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
|
5414 |
|
|
if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
|
5415 |
|
|
this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx_COMPARE (VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
|
5416 |
|
|
CONST0_RTX (mode));
|
5417 |
|
|
}
|
5418 |
|
|
#endif
|
5419 |
|
|
}
|
5420 |
|
|
|
5421 |
|
|
/* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
|
5422 |
|
|
if they are not already present.
|
5423 |
|
|
Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
|
5424 |
|
|
This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
|
5425 |
|
|
the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
|
5426 |
|
|
(having been invalidated). */
|
5427 |
|
|
|
5428 |
|
|
if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
|
5429 |
|
|
&& ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
|
5430 |
|
|
{
|
5431 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
5432 |
|
|
struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
|
5433 |
|
|
rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
|
5434 |
|
|
enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
|
5435 |
|
|
|
5436 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
5437 |
|
|
{
|
5438 |
|
|
eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
|
5439 |
|
|
classp = 0;
|
5440 |
|
|
}
|
5441 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
|
5442 |
|
|
{
|
5443 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (src_eqv);
|
5444 |
|
|
src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
|
5445 |
|
|
}
|
5446 |
|
|
elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
|
5447 |
|
|
elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
|
5448 |
|
|
src_eqv_elt = elt;
|
5449 |
|
|
|
5450 |
|
|
/* Check to see if src_eqv_elt is the same as a set source which
|
5451 |
|
|
does not yet have an elt, and if so set the elt of the set source
|
5452 |
|
|
to src_eqv_elt. */
|
5453 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
|
5454 |
|
|
if (sets[i].rtl && sets[i].src_elt == 0
|
5455 |
|
|
&& rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_eqv))
|
5456 |
|
|
sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
|
5457 |
|
|
}
|
5458 |
|
|
|
5459 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
|
5460 |
|
|
if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
|
5461 |
|
|
&& ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
|
5462 |
|
|
{
|
5463 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
5464 |
|
|
{
|
5465 |
|
|
/* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
|
5466 |
|
|
gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
|
5467 |
|
|
not just for the subreg being stored in now.
|
5468 |
|
|
This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
|
5469 |
|
|
to treat the entire reg as the destination. */
|
5470 |
|
|
sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
|
5471 |
|
|
sets[i].src_hash = src_eqv_hash;
|
5472 |
|
|
}
|
5473 |
|
|
else
|
5474 |
|
|
{
|
5475 |
|
|
/* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
|
5476 |
|
|
already present. */
|
5477 |
|
|
struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
|
5478 |
|
|
rtx src = sets[i].src;
|
5479 |
|
|
rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
|
5480 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode
|
5481 |
|
|
= GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
|
5482 |
|
|
|
5483 |
|
|
/* It's possible that we have a source value known to be
|
5484 |
|
|
constant but don't have a REG_EQUAL note on the insn.
|
5485 |
|
|
Lack of a note will mean src_eqv_elt will be NULL. This
|
5486 |
|
|
can happen where we've generated a SUBREG to access a
|
5487 |
|
|
CONST_INT that is already in a register in a wider mode.
|
5488 |
|
|
Ensure that the source expression is put in the proper
|
5489 |
|
|
constant class. */
|
5490 |
|
|
if (!classp)
|
5491 |
|
|
classp = sets[i].src_const_elt;
|
5492 |
|
|
|
5493 |
|
|
if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
|
5494 |
|
|
{
|
5495 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
5496 |
|
|
|
5497 |
|
|
/* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
|
5498 |
|
|
any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
|
5499 |
|
|
match if not still valid. */
|
5500 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
|
5501 |
|
|
{
|
5502 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (src);
|
5503 |
|
|
sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
|
5504 |
|
|
}
|
5505 |
|
|
elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
|
5506 |
|
|
elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
|
5507 |
|
|
sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
|
5508 |
|
|
}
|
5509 |
|
|
if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
|
5510 |
|
|
&& src != sets[i].src_const
|
5511 |
|
|
&& ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
|
5512 |
|
|
sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
|
5513 |
|
|
sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
|
5514 |
|
|
}
|
5515 |
|
|
}
|
5516 |
|
|
else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
|
5517 |
|
|
/* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
|
5518 |
|
|
volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
|
5519 |
|
|
so that the destination goes into that class. */
|
5520 |
|
|
sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
|
5521 |
|
|
|
5522 |
|
|
/* Record destination addresses in the hash table. This allows us to
|
5523 |
|
|
check if they are invalidated by other sets. */
|
5524 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
|
5525 |
|
|
{
|
5526 |
|
|
if (sets[i].rtl)
|
5527 |
|
|
{
|
5528 |
|
|
rtx x = sets[i].inner_dest;
|
5529 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
5530 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode;
|
5531 |
|
|
unsigned hash;
|
5532 |
|
|
|
5533 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (x))
|
5534 |
|
|
{
|
5535 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, 0);
|
5536 |
|
|
mode = GET_MODE (x);
|
5537 |
|
|
hash = HASH (x, mode);
|
5538 |
|
|
elt = lookup (x, hash, mode);
|
5539 |
|
|
if (!elt)
|
5540 |
|
|
{
|
5541 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (x, NULL, 0))
|
5542 |
|
|
{
|
5543 |
|
|
rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
|
5544 |
|
|
|
5545 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (x);
|
5546 |
|
|
hash = HASH (x, mode);
|
5547 |
|
|
sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
|
5548 |
|
|
}
|
5549 |
|
|
elt = insert (x, NULL, hash, mode);
|
5550 |
|
|
}
|
5551 |
|
|
|
5552 |
|
|
sets[i].dest_addr_elt = elt;
|
5553 |
|
|
}
|
5554 |
|
|
else
|
5555 |
|
|
sets[i].dest_addr_elt = NULL;
|
5556 |
|
|
}
|
5557 |
|
|
}
|
5558 |
|
|
|
5559 |
|
|
invalidate_from_clobbers (x);
|
5560 |
|
|
|
5561 |
|
|
/* Some registers are invalidated by subroutine calls. Memory is
|
5562 |
|
|
invalidated by non-constant calls. */
|
5563 |
|
|
|
5564 |
|
|
if (CALL_P (insn))
|
5565 |
|
|
{
|
5566 |
|
|
if (!(RTL_CONST_OR_PURE_CALL_P (insn)))
|
5567 |
|
|
invalidate_memory ();
|
5568 |
|
|
invalidate_for_call ();
|
5569 |
|
|
}
|
5570 |
|
|
|
5571 |
|
|
/* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
|
5572 |
|
|
If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
|
5573 |
|
|
sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
|
5574 |
|
|
a part of which is being set. */
|
5575 |
|
|
|
5576 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
|
5577 |
|
|
if (sets[i].rtl)
|
5578 |
|
|
{
|
5579 |
|
|
/* We can't use the inner dest, because the mode associated with
|
5580 |
|
|
a ZERO_EXTRACT is significant. */
|
5581 |
|
|
rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
|
5582 |
|
|
|
5583 |
|
|
/* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
|
5584 |
|
|
previous quantity's chain.
|
5585 |
|
|
Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
|
5586 |
|
|
we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those. */
|
5587 |
|
|
if (REG_P (dest) || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
|
5588 |
|
|
invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
|
5589 |
|
|
else if (MEM_P (dest))
|
5590 |
|
|
invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
|
5591 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
|
5592 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
5593 |
|
|
invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0), GET_MODE (dest));
|
5594 |
|
|
}
|
5595 |
|
|
|
5596 |
|
|
/* A volatile ASM invalidates everything. */
|
5597 |
|
|
if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (insn)
|
5598 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == ASM_OPERANDS
|
5599 |
|
|
&& MEM_VOLATILE_P (PATTERN (insn)))
|
5600 |
|
|
flush_hash_table ();
|
5601 |
|
|
|
5602 |
|
|
/* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg VAX)
|
5603 |
|
|
the regs restored by the longjmp come from a later time
|
5604 |
|
|
than the setjmp. */
|
5605 |
|
|
if (CALL_P (insn) && find_reg_note (insn, REG_SETJMP, NULL))
|
5606 |
|
|
{
|
5607 |
|
|
flush_hash_table ();
|
5608 |
|
|
goto done;
|
5609 |
|
|
}
|
5610 |
|
|
|
5611 |
|
|
/* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
|
5612 |
|
|
are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
|
5613 |
|
|
This removes from the hash table
|
5614 |
|
|
any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
|
5615 |
|
|
|
5616 |
|
|
We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
|
5617 |
|
|
we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally. */
|
5618 |
|
|
|
5619 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
|
5620 |
|
|
{
|
5621 |
|
|
if (sets[i].rtl)
|
5622 |
|
|
{
|
5623 |
|
|
rtx x = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
|
5624 |
|
|
|
5625 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (x))
|
5626 |
|
|
mention_regs (x);
|
5627 |
|
|
else
|
5628 |
|
|
{
|
5629 |
|
|
/* We used to rely on all references to a register becoming
|
5630 |
|
|
inaccessible when a register changes to a new quantity,
|
5631 |
|
|
since that changes the hash code. However, that is not
|
5632 |
|
|
safe, since after HASH_SIZE new quantities we get a
|
5633 |
|
|
hash 'collision' of a register with its own invalid
|
5634 |
|
|
entries. And since SUBREGs have been changed not to
|
5635 |
|
|
change their hash code with the hash code of the register,
|
5636 |
|
|
it wouldn't work any longer at all. So we have to check
|
5637 |
|
|
for any invalid references lying around now.
|
5638 |
|
|
This code is similar to the REG case in mention_regs,
|
5639 |
|
|
but it knows that reg_tick has been incremented, and
|
5640 |
|
|
it leaves reg_in_table as -1 . */
|
5641 |
|
|
unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
|
5642 |
|
|
unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
|
5643 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
5644 |
|
|
|
5645 |
|
|
for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
|
5646 |
|
|
{
|
5647 |
|
|
if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0)
|
5648 |
|
|
{
|
5649 |
|
|
remove_invalid_refs (i);
|
5650 |
|
|
REG_IN_TABLE (i) = -1;
|
5651 |
|
|
}
|
5652 |
|
|
}
|
5653 |
|
|
}
|
5654 |
|
|
}
|
5655 |
|
|
}
|
5656 |
|
|
|
5657 |
|
|
/* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
|
5658 |
|
|
So replace each one with the current head of the same class.
|
5659 |
|
|
Also check if destination addresses have been removed. */
|
5660 |
|
|
|
5661 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
|
5662 |
|
|
if (sets[i].rtl)
|
5663 |
|
|
{
|
5664 |
|
|
if (sets[i].dest_addr_elt
|
5665 |
|
|
&& sets[i].dest_addr_elt->first_same_value == 0)
|
5666 |
|
|
{
|
5667 |
|
|
/* The elt was removed, which means this destination is not
|
5668 |
|
|
valid after this instruction. */
|
5669 |
|
|
sets[i].rtl = NULL_RTX;
|
5670 |
|
|
}
|
5671 |
|
|
else if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
|
5672 |
|
|
/* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
|
5673 |
|
|
or 0 if nothing remains of that class. */
|
5674 |
|
|
{
|
5675 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
|
5676 |
|
|
|
5677 |
|
|
while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
|
5678 |
|
|
elt = elt->prev_same_value;
|
5679 |
|
|
|
5680 |
|
|
while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
|
5681 |
|
|
elt = elt->next_same_value;
|
5682 |
|
|
sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
|
5683 |
|
|
}
|
5684 |
|
|
}
|
5685 |
|
|
|
5686 |
|
|
/* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes. */
|
5687 |
|
|
|
5688 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
|
5689 |
|
|
if (sets[i].rtl)
|
5690 |
|
|
{
|
5691 |
|
|
rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
|
5692 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt;
|
5693 |
|
|
|
5694 |
|
|
/* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
|
5695 |
|
|
floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
|
5696 |
|
|
memory. */
|
5697 |
|
|
if ((flag_float_store
|
5698 |
|
|
&& MEM_P (dest)
|
5699 |
|
|
&& FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest)))
|
5700 |
|
|
/* Don't record BLKmode values, because we don't know the
|
5701 |
|
|
size of it, and can't be sure that other BLKmode values
|
5702 |
|
|
have the same or smaller size. */
|
5703 |
|
|
|| GET_MODE (dest) == BLKmode
|
5704 |
|
|
/* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
|
5705 |
|
|
table, there is no point is recording DEST. */
|
5706 |
|
|
|| sets[i].src_elt == 0
|
5707 |
|
|
/* If DEST is a paradoxical SUBREG and SRC is a ZERO_EXTEND
|
5708 |
|
|
or SIGN_EXTEND, don't record DEST since it can cause
|
5709 |
|
|
some tracking to be wrong.
|
5710 |
|
|
|
5711 |
|
|
??? Think about this more later. */
|
5712 |
|
|
|| (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
|
5713 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
|
5714 |
|
|
> GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
|
5715 |
|
|
&& (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) == SIGN_EXTEND
|
5716 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (sets[i].src) == ZERO_EXTEND)))
|
5717 |
|
|
continue;
|
5718 |
|
|
|
5719 |
|
|
/* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
|
5720 |
|
|
and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
|
5721 |
|
|
Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT. */
|
5722 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
5723 |
|
|
dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
|
5724 |
|
|
|
5725 |
|
|
if (REG_P (dest) || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
|
5726 |
|
|
/* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities. */
|
5727 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
|
5728 |
|
|
{
|
5729 |
|
|
/* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
|
5730 |
|
|
recalculated. */
|
5731 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (dest);
|
5732 |
|
|
sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
|
5733 |
|
|
}
|
5734 |
|
|
|
5735 |
|
|
elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
|
5736 |
|
|
sets[i].dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest));
|
5737 |
|
|
|
5738 |
|
|
/* If this is a constant, insert the constant anchors with the
|
5739 |
|
|
equivalent register-offset expressions using register DEST. */
|
5740 |
|
|
if (targetm.const_anchor
|
5741 |
|
|
&& REG_P (dest)
|
5742 |
|
|
&& SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest))
|
5743 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (sets[i].src_elt->exp) == CONST_INT)
|
5744 |
|
|
insert_const_anchors (dest, sets[i].src_elt->exp, GET_MODE (dest));
|
5745 |
|
|
|
5746 |
|
|
elt->in_memory = (MEM_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
|
5747 |
|
|
&& !MEM_READONLY_P (sets[i].inner_dest));
|
5748 |
|
|
|
5749 |
|
|
/* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
|
5750 |
|
|
narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
|
5751 |
|
|
we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
|
5752 |
|
|
make that equivalence as well.
|
5753 |
|
|
|
5754 |
|
|
However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart
|
5755 |
|
|
will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart applied to
|
5756 |
|
|
BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
|
5757 |
|
|
BAR's equivalences. If we don't get a simplified form, make
|
5758 |
|
|
the SUBREG. It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
|
5759 |
|
|
cause two similar assignments to be detected.
|
5760 |
|
|
|
5761 |
|
|
Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
|
5762 |
|
|
already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table. */
|
5763 |
|
|
|
5764 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
|
5765 |
|
|
&& (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) - 1)
|
5766 |
|
|
/ UNITS_PER_WORD)
|
5767 |
|
|
== (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
|
5768 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
|
5769 |
|
|
>= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
|
5770 |
|
|
&& sets[i].src_elt != 0)
|
5771 |
|
|
{
|
5772 |
|
|
enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
|
5773 |
|
|
struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
|
5774 |
|
|
|
5775 |
|
|
for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
|
5776 |
|
|
elt = elt->next_same_value)
|
5777 |
|
|
{
|
5778 |
|
|
rtx new_src = 0;
|
5779 |
|
|
unsigned src_hash;
|
5780 |
|
|
struct table_elt *src_elt;
|
5781 |
|
|
int byte = 0;
|
5782 |
|
|
|
5783 |
|
|
/* Ignore invalid entries. */
|
5784 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (elt->exp)
|
5785 |
|
|
&& ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
|
5786 |
|
|
continue;
|
5787 |
|
|
|
5788 |
|
|
/* We may have already been playing subreg games. If the
|
5789 |
|
|
mode is already correct for the destination, use it. */
|
5790 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (elt->exp) == new_mode)
|
5791 |
|
|
new_src = elt->exp;
|
5792 |
|
|
else
|
5793 |
|
|
{
|
5794 |
|
|
/* Calculate big endian correction for the SUBREG_BYTE.
|
5795 |
|
|
We have already checked that M1 (GET_MODE (dest))
|
5796 |
|
|
is not narrower than M2 (new_mode). */
|
5797 |
|
|
if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
|
5798 |
|
|
byte = (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
|
5799 |
|
|
- GET_MODE_SIZE (new_mode));
|
5800 |
|
|
|
5801 |
|
|
new_src = simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode, elt->exp,
|
5802 |
|
|
GET_MODE (dest), byte);
|
5803 |
|
|
}
|
5804 |
|
|
|
5805 |
|
|
/* The call to simplify_gen_subreg fails if the value
|
5806 |
|
|
is VOIDmode, yet we can't do any simplification, e.g.
|
5807 |
|
|
for EXPR_LISTs denoting function call results.
|
5808 |
|
|
It is invalid to construct a SUBREG with a VOIDmode
|
5809 |
|
|
SUBREG_REG, hence a zero new_src means we can't do
|
5810 |
|
|
this substitution. */
|
5811 |
|
|
if (! new_src)
|
5812 |
|
|
continue;
|
5813 |
|
|
|
5814 |
|
|
src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
|
5815 |
|
|
src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
|
5816 |
|
|
|
5817 |
|
|
/* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
|
5818 |
|
|
already. */
|
5819 |
|
|
if (src_elt == 0)
|
5820 |
|
|
{
|
5821 |
|
|
if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
|
5822 |
|
|
{
|
5823 |
|
|
rehash_using_reg (new_src);
|
5824 |
|
|
src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
|
5825 |
|
|
}
|
5826 |
|
|
src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
|
5827 |
|
|
src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
|
5828 |
|
|
}
|
5829 |
|
|
else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
|
5830 |
|
|
/* Show that two things that we've seen before are
|
5831 |
|
|
actually the same. */
|
5832 |
|
|
merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
|
5833 |
|
|
|
5834 |
|
|
classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
|
5835 |
|
|
/* Ignore invalid entries. */
|
5836 |
|
|
while (classp
|
5837 |
|
|
&& !REG_P (classp->exp)
|
5838 |
|
|
&& ! exp_equiv_p (classp->exp, classp->exp, 1, false))
|
5839 |
|
|
classp = classp->next_same_value;
|
5840 |
|
|
}
|
5841 |
|
|
}
|
5842 |
|
|
}
|
5843 |
|
|
|
5844 |
|
|
/* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1) where REG0 is the
|
5845 |
|
|
"cheapest", cheaper than REG1. After cse, REG1 will probably not
|
5846 |
|
|
be used in the sequel, so (if easily done) change this insn to
|
5847 |
|
|
(set REG1 REG0) and replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn
|
5848 |
|
|
that computed their value. Then REG1 will become a dead store
|
5849 |
|
|
and won't cloud the situation for later optimizations.
|
5850 |
|
|
|
5851 |
|
|
Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
|
5852 |
|
|
then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
|
5853 |
|
|
into a three-operand insn.
|
5854 |
|
|
|
5855 |
|
|
Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN. */
|
5856 |
|
|
|
5857 |
|
|
if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && REG_P (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))
|
5858 |
|
|
&& NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
|
5859 |
|
|
&& REG_P (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
|
5860 |
|
|
&& REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
5861 |
|
|
&& REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))))
|
5862 |
|
|
{
|
5863 |
|
|
int src_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)));
|
5864 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *src_ent = &qty_table[src_q];
|
5865 |
|
|
|
5866 |
|
|
if (src_ent->first_reg == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
|
5867 |
|
|
{
|
5868 |
|
|
/* Scan for the previous nonnote insn, but stop at a basic
|
5869 |
|
|
block boundary. */
|
5870 |
|
|
rtx prev = insn;
|
5871 |
|
|
rtx bb_head = BB_HEAD (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn));
|
5872 |
|
|
do
|
5873 |
|
|
{
|
5874 |
|
|
prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
|
5875 |
|
|
}
|
5876 |
|
|
while (prev != bb_head && (NOTE_P (prev) || DEBUG_INSN_P (prev)));
|
5877 |
|
|
|
5878 |
|
|
/* Do not swap the registers around if the previous instruction
|
5879 |
|
|
attaches a REG_EQUIV note to REG1.
|
5880 |
|
|
|
5881 |
|
|
??? It's not entirely clear whether we can transfer a REG_EQUIV
|
5882 |
|
|
from the pseudo that originally shadowed an incoming argument
|
5883 |
|
|
to another register. Some uses of REG_EQUIV might rely on it
|
5884 |
|
|
being attached to REG1 rather than REG2.
|
5885 |
|
|
|
5886 |
|
|
This section previously turned the REG_EQUIV into a REG_EQUAL
|
5887 |
|
|
note. We cannot do that because REG_EQUIV may provide an
|
5888 |
|
|
uninitialized stack slot when REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is used. */
|
5889 |
|
|
if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
|
5890 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
|
5891 |
|
|
&& SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)
|
5892 |
|
|
&& ! find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX))
|
5893 |
|
|
{
|
5894 |
|
|
rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
|
5895 |
|
|
rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl);
|
5896 |
|
|
rtx note;
|
5897 |
|
|
|
5898 |
|
|
validate_change (prev, &SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
|
5899 |
|
|
validate_change (insn, &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), src, 1);
|
5900 |
|
|
validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
|
5901 |
|
|
apply_change_group ();
|
5902 |
|
|
|
5903 |
|
|
/* If INSN has a REG_EQUAL note, and this note mentions
|
5904 |
|
|
REG0, then we must delete it, because the value in
|
5905 |
|
|
REG0 has changed. If the note's value is REG1, we must
|
5906 |
|
|
also delete it because that is now this insn's dest. */
|
5907 |
|
|
note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
|
5908 |
|
|
if (note != 0
|
5909 |
|
|
&& (reg_mentioned_p (dest, XEXP (note, 0))
|
5910 |
|
|
|| rtx_equal_p (src, XEXP (note, 0))))
|
5911 |
|
|
remove_note (insn, note);
|
5912 |
|
|
}
|
5913 |
|
|
}
|
5914 |
|
|
}
|
5915 |
|
|
|
5916 |
|
|
done:;
|
5917 |
|
|
}
|
5918 |
|
|
|
5919 |
|
|
/* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory. */
|
5920 |
|
|
|
5921 |
|
|
static void
|
5922 |
|
|
invalidate_memory (void)
|
5923 |
|
|
{
|
5924 |
|
|
int i;
|
5925 |
|
|
struct table_elt *p, *next;
|
5926 |
|
|
|
5927 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
|
5928 |
|
|
for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
|
5929 |
|
|
{
|
5930 |
|
|
next = p->next_same_hash;
|
5931 |
|
|
if (p->in_memory)
|
5932 |
|
|
remove_from_table (p, i);
|
5933 |
|
|
}
|
5934 |
|
|
}
|
5935 |
|
|
|
5936 |
|
|
/* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
|
5937 |
|
|
except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
|
5938 |
|
|
This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
|
5939 |
|
|
alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
|
5940 |
|
|
|
5941 |
|
|
X is the pattern of the insn. */
|
5942 |
|
|
|
5943 |
|
|
static void
|
5944 |
|
|
invalidate_from_clobbers (rtx x)
|
5945 |
|
|
{
|
5946 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
|
5947 |
|
|
{
|
5948 |
|
|
rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
|
5949 |
|
|
if (ref)
|
5950 |
|
|
{
|
5951 |
|
|
if (REG_P (ref) || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
|
5952 |
|
|
|| MEM_P (ref))
|
5953 |
|
|
invalidate (ref, VOIDmode);
|
5954 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
|
5955 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
5956 |
|
|
invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0), GET_MODE (ref));
|
5957 |
|
|
}
|
5958 |
|
|
}
|
5959 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
|
5960 |
|
|
{
|
5961 |
|
|
int i;
|
5962 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
5963 |
|
|
{
|
5964 |
|
|
rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
|
5965 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
|
5966 |
|
|
{
|
5967 |
|
|
rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
|
5968 |
|
|
if (REG_P (ref) || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
|
5969 |
|
|
|| MEM_P (ref))
|
5970 |
|
|
invalidate (ref, VOIDmode);
|
5971 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
|
5972 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
5973 |
|
|
invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0), GET_MODE (ref));
|
5974 |
|
|
}
|
5975 |
|
|
}
|
5976 |
|
|
}
|
5977 |
|
|
}
|
5978 |
|
|
|
5979 |
|
|
/* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
|
5980 |
|
|
and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
|
5981 |
|
|
or the canonical form of the register. If we are inside an address,
|
5982 |
|
|
only do this if the address remains valid.
|
5983 |
|
|
|
5984 |
|
|
OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
|
5985 |
|
|
|
5986 |
|
|
Return the replacement for X. */
|
5987 |
|
|
|
5988 |
|
|
static rtx
|
5989 |
|
|
cse_process_notes_1 (rtx x, rtx object, bool *changed)
|
5990 |
|
|
{
|
5991 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
|
5992 |
|
|
const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
5993 |
|
|
int i;
|
5994 |
|
|
|
5995 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
5996 |
|
|
{
|
5997 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
5998 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
5999 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
6000 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
6001 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
6002 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
6003 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
6004 |
|
|
case PC:
|
6005 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
6006 |
|
|
case LO_SUM:
|
6007 |
|
|
return x;
|
6008 |
|
|
|
6009 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
6010 |
|
|
validate_change (x, &XEXP (x, 0),
|
6011 |
|
|
cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x, changed), 0);
|
6012 |
|
|
return x;
|
6013 |
|
|
|
6014 |
|
|
case EXPR_LIST:
|
6015 |
|
|
case INSN_LIST:
|
6016 |
|
|
if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
|
6017 |
|
|
XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX, changed);
|
6018 |
|
|
if (XEXP (x, 1))
|
6019 |
|
|
XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX, changed);
|
6020 |
|
|
return x;
|
6021 |
|
|
|
6022 |
|
|
case SIGN_EXTEND:
|
6023 |
|
|
case ZERO_EXTEND:
|
6024 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
6025 |
|
|
{
|
6026 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object, changed);
|
6027 |
|
|
/* We don't substitute VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
|
6028 |
|
|
since they would impede folding. */
|
6029 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (new_rtx) != VOIDmode)
|
6030 |
|
|
validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new_rtx, 0);
|
6031 |
|
|
return x;
|
6032 |
|
|
}
|
6033 |
|
|
|
6034 |
|
|
case REG:
|
6035 |
|
|
i = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
|
6036 |
|
|
|
6037 |
|
|
/* Return a constant or a constant register. */
|
6038 |
|
|
if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
|
6039 |
|
|
{
|
6040 |
|
|
struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[i];
|
6041 |
|
|
|
6042 |
|
|
if (ent->const_rtx != NULL_RTX
|
6043 |
|
|
&& (CONSTANT_P (ent->const_rtx)
|
6044 |
|
|
|| REG_P (ent->const_rtx)))
|
6045 |
|
|
{
|
6046 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), ent->const_rtx);
|
6047 |
|
|
if (new_rtx)
|
6048 |
|
|
return copy_rtx (new_rtx);
|
6049 |
|
|
}
|
6050 |
|
|
}
|
6051 |
|
|
|
6052 |
|
|
/* Otherwise, canonicalize this register. */
|
6053 |
|
|
return canon_reg (x, NULL_RTX);
|
6054 |
|
|
|
6055 |
|
|
default:
|
6056 |
|
|
break;
|
6057 |
|
|
}
|
6058 |
|
|
|
6059 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
|
6060 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
6061 |
|
|
validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
|
6062 |
|
|
cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object, changed), 0);
|
6063 |
|
|
|
6064 |
|
|
return x;
|
6065 |
|
|
}
|
6066 |
|
|
|
6067 |
|
|
static rtx
|
6068 |
|
|
cse_process_notes (rtx x, rtx object, bool *changed)
|
6069 |
|
|
{
|
6070 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = cse_process_notes_1 (x, object, changed);
|
6071 |
|
|
if (new_rtx != x)
|
6072 |
|
|
*changed = true;
|
6073 |
|
|
return new_rtx;
|
6074 |
|
|
}
|
6075 |
|
|
|
6076 |
|
|
|
6077 |
|
|
/* Find a path in the CFG, starting with FIRST_BB to perform CSE on.
|
6078 |
|
|
|
6079 |
|
|
DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, that is used to
|
6080 |
|
|
describe the path.
|
6081 |
|
|
It is filled with a queue of basic blocks, starting with FIRST_BB
|
6082 |
|
|
and following a trace through the CFG.
|
6083 |
|
|
|
6084 |
|
|
If all paths starting at FIRST_BB have been followed, or no new path
|
6085 |
|
|
starting at FIRST_BB can be constructed, this function returns FALSE.
|
6086 |
|
|
Otherwise, DATA->path is filled and the function returns TRUE indicating
|
6087 |
|
|
that a path to follow was found.
|
6088 |
|
|
|
6089 |
|
|
If FOLLOW_JUMPS is false, the maximum path length is 1 and the only
|
6090 |
|
|
block in the path will be FIRST_BB. */
|
6091 |
|
|
|
6092 |
|
|
static bool
|
6093 |
|
|
cse_find_path (basic_block first_bb, struct cse_basic_block_data *data,
|
6094 |
|
|
int follow_jumps)
|
6095 |
|
|
{
|
6096 |
|
|
basic_block bb;
|
6097 |
|
|
edge e;
|
6098 |
|
|
int path_size;
|
6099 |
|
|
|
6100 |
|
|
SET_BIT (cse_visited_basic_blocks, first_bb->index);
|
6101 |
|
|
|
6102 |
|
|
/* See if there is a previous path. */
|
6103 |
|
|
path_size = data->path_size;
|
6104 |
|
|
|
6105 |
|
|
/* There is a previous path. Make sure it started with FIRST_BB. */
|
6106 |
|
|
if (path_size)
|
6107 |
|
|
gcc_assert (data->path[0].bb == first_bb);
|
6108 |
|
|
|
6109 |
|
|
/* There was only one basic block in the last path. Clear the path and
|
6110 |
|
|
return, so that paths starting at another basic block can be tried. */
|
6111 |
|
|
if (path_size == 1)
|
6112 |
|
|
{
|
6113 |
|
|
path_size = 0;
|
6114 |
|
|
goto done;
|
6115 |
|
|
}
|
6116 |
|
|
|
6117 |
|
|
/* If the path was empty from the beginning, construct a new path. */
|
6118 |
|
|
if (path_size == 0)
|
6119 |
|
|
data->path[path_size++].bb = first_bb;
|
6120 |
|
|
else
|
6121 |
|
|
{
|
6122 |
|
|
/* Otherwise, path_size must be equal to or greater than 2, because
|
6123 |
|
|
a previous path exists that is at least two basic blocks long.
|
6124 |
|
|
|
6125 |
|
|
Update the previous branch path, if any. If the last branch was
|
6126 |
|
|
previously along the branch edge, take the fallthrough edge now. */
|
6127 |
|
|
while (path_size >= 2)
|
6128 |
|
|
{
|
6129 |
|
|
basic_block last_bb_in_path, previous_bb_in_path;
|
6130 |
|
|
edge e;
|
6131 |
|
|
|
6132 |
|
|
--path_size;
|
6133 |
|
|
last_bb_in_path = data->path[path_size].bb;
|
6134 |
|
|
previous_bb_in_path = data->path[path_size - 1].bb;
|
6135 |
|
|
|
6136 |
|
|
/* If we previously followed a path along the branch edge, try
|
6137 |
|
|
the fallthru edge now. */
|
6138 |
|
|
if (EDGE_COUNT (previous_bb_in_path->succs) == 2
|
6139 |
|
|
&& any_condjump_p (BB_END (previous_bb_in_path))
|
6140 |
|
|
&& (e = find_edge (previous_bb_in_path, last_bb_in_path))
|
6141 |
|
|
&& e == BRANCH_EDGE (previous_bb_in_path))
|
6142 |
|
|
{
|
6143 |
|
|
bb = FALLTHRU_EDGE (previous_bb_in_path)->dest;
|
6144 |
|
|
if (bb != EXIT_BLOCK_PTR
|
6145 |
|
|
&& single_pred_p (bb)
|
6146 |
|
|
/* We used to assert here that we would only see blocks
|
6147 |
|
|
that we have not visited yet. But we may end up
|
6148 |
|
|
visiting basic blocks twice if the CFG has changed
|
6149 |
|
|
in this run of cse_main, because when the CFG changes
|
6150 |
|
|
the topological sort of the CFG also changes. A basic
|
6151 |
|
|
blocks that previously had more than two predecessors
|
6152 |
|
|
may now have a single predecessor, and become part of
|
6153 |
|
|
a path that starts at another basic block.
|
6154 |
|
|
|
6155 |
|
|
We still want to visit each basic block only once, so
|
6156 |
|
|
halt the path here if we have already visited BB. */
|
6157 |
|
|
&& !TEST_BIT (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index))
|
6158 |
|
|
{
|
6159 |
|
|
SET_BIT (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index);
|
6160 |
|
|
data->path[path_size++].bb = bb;
|
6161 |
|
|
break;
|
6162 |
|
|
}
|
6163 |
|
|
}
|
6164 |
|
|
|
6165 |
|
|
data->path[path_size].bb = NULL;
|
6166 |
|
|
}
|
6167 |
|
|
|
6168 |
|
|
/* If only one block remains in the path, bail. */
|
6169 |
|
|
if (path_size == 1)
|
6170 |
|
|
{
|
6171 |
|
|
path_size = 0;
|
6172 |
|
|
goto done;
|
6173 |
|
|
}
|
6174 |
|
|
}
|
6175 |
|
|
|
6176 |
|
|
/* Extend the path if possible. */
|
6177 |
|
|
if (follow_jumps)
|
6178 |
|
|
{
|
6179 |
|
|
bb = data->path[path_size - 1].bb;
|
6180 |
|
|
while (bb && path_size < PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_CSE_PATH_LENGTH))
|
6181 |
|
|
{
|
6182 |
|
|
if (single_succ_p (bb))
|
6183 |
|
|
e = single_succ_edge (bb);
|
6184 |
|
|
else if (EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 2
|
6185 |
|
|
&& any_condjump_p (BB_END (bb)))
|
6186 |
|
|
{
|
6187 |
|
|
/* First try to follow the branch. If that doesn't lead
|
6188 |
|
|
to a useful path, follow the fallthru edge. */
|
6189 |
|
|
e = BRANCH_EDGE (bb);
|
6190 |
|
|
if (!single_pred_p (e->dest))
|
6191 |
|
|
e = FALLTHRU_EDGE (bb);
|
6192 |
|
|
}
|
6193 |
|
|
else
|
6194 |
|
|
e = NULL;
|
6195 |
|
|
|
6196 |
|
|
if (e && e->dest != EXIT_BLOCK_PTR
|
6197 |
|
|
&& single_pred_p (e->dest)
|
6198 |
|
|
/* Avoid visiting basic blocks twice. The large comment
|
6199 |
|
|
above explains why this can happen. */
|
6200 |
|
|
&& !TEST_BIT (cse_visited_basic_blocks, e->dest->index))
|
6201 |
|
|
{
|
6202 |
|
|
basic_block bb2 = e->dest;
|
6203 |
|
|
SET_BIT (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb2->index);
|
6204 |
|
|
data->path[path_size++].bb = bb2;
|
6205 |
|
|
bb = bb2;
|
6206 |
|
|
}
|
6207 |
|
|
else
|
6208 |
|
|
bb = NULL;
|
6209 |
|
|
}
|
6210 |
|
|
}
|
6211 |
|
|
|
6212 |
|
|
done:
|
6213 |
|
|
data->path_size = path_size;
|
6214 |
|
|
return path_size != 0;
|
6215 |
|
|
}
|
6216 |
|
|
|
6217 |
|
|
/* Dump the path in DATA to file F. NSETS is the number of sets
|
6218 |
|
|
in the path. */
|
6219 |
|
|
|
6220 |
|
|
static void
|
6221 |
|
|
cse_dump_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *data, int nsets, FILE *f)
|
6222 |
|
|
{
|
6223 |
|
|
int path_entry;
|
6224 |
|
|
|
6225 |
|
|
fprintf (f, ";; Following path with %d sets: ", nsets);
|
6226 |
|
|
for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < data->path_size; path_entry++)
|
6227 |
|
|
fprintf (f, "%d ", (data->path[path_entry].bb)->index);
|
6228 |
|
|
fputc ('\n', dump_file);
|
6229 |
|
|
fflush (f);
|
6230 |
|
|
}
|
6231 |
|
|
|
6232 |
|
|
|
6233 |
|
|
/* Return true if BB has exception handling successor edges. */
|
6234 |
|
|
|
6235 |
|
|
static bool
|
6236 |
|
|
have_eh_succ_edges (basic_block bb)
|
6237 |
|
|
{
|
6238 |
|
|
edge e;
|
6239 |
|
|
edge_iterator ei;
|
6240 |
|
|
|
6241 |
|
|
FOR_EACH_EDGE (e, ei, bb->succs)
|
6242 |
|
|
if (e->flags & EDGE_EH)
|
6243 |
|
|
return true;
|
6244 |
|
|
|
6245 |
|
|
return false;
|
6246 |
|
|
}
|
6247 |
|
|
|
6248 |
|
|
|
6249 |
|
|
/* Scan to the end of the path described by DATA. Return an estimate of
|
6250 |
|
|
the total number of SETs of all insns in the path. */
|
6251 |
|
|
|
6252 |
|
|
static void
|
6253 |
|
|
cse_prescan_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *data)
|
6254 |
|
|
{
|
6255 |
|
|
int nsets = 0;
|
6256 |
|
|
int path_size = data->path_size;
|
6257 |
|
|
int path_entry;
|
6258 |
|
|
|
6259 |
|
|
/* Scan to end of each basic block in the path. */
|
6260 |
|
|
for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < path_size; path_entry++)
|
6261 |
|
|
{
|
6262 |
|
|
basic_block bb;
|
6263 |
|
|
rtx insn;
|
6264 |
|
|
|
6265 |
|
|
bb = data->path[path_entry].bb;
|
6266 |
|
|
|
6267 |
|
|
FOR_BB_INSNS (bb, insn)
|
6268 |
|
|
{
|
6269 |
|
|
if (!INSN_P (insn))
|
6270 |
|
|
continue;
|
6271 |
|
|
|
6272 |
|
|
/* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
|
6273 |
|
|
especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS. */
|
6274 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
|
6275 |
|
|
nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0);
|
6276 |
|
|
else
|
6277 |
|
|
nsets += 1;
|
6278 |
|
|
}
|
6279 |
|
|
}
|
6280 |
|
|
|
6281 |
|
|
data->nsets = nsets;
|
6282 |
|
|
}
|
6283 |
|
|
|
6284 |
|
|
/* Process a single extended basic block described by EBB_DATA. */
|
6285 |
|
|
|
6286 |
|
|
static void
|
6287 |
|
|
cse_extended_basic_block (struct cse_basic_block_data *ebb_data)
|
6288 |
|
|
{
|
6289 |
|
|
int path_size = ebb_data->path_size;
|
6290 |
|
|
int path_entry;
|
6291 |
|
|
int num_insns = 0;
|
6292 |
|
|
|
6293 |
|
|
/* Allocate the space needed by qty_table. */
|
6294 |
|
|
qty_table = XNEWVEC (struct qty_table_elem, max_qty);
|
6295 |
|
|
|
6296 |
|
|
new_basic_block ();
|
6297 |
|
|
cse_ebb_live_in = df_get_live_in (ebb_data->path[0].bb);
|
6298 |
|
|
cse_ebb_live_out = df_get_live_out (ebb_data->path[path_size - 1].bb);
|
6299 |
|
|
for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < path_size; path_entry++)
|
6300 |
|
|
{
|
6301 |
|
|
basic_block bb;
|
6302 |
|
|
rtx insn;
|
6303 |
|
|
|
6304 |
|
|
bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry].bb;
|
6305 |
|
|
|
6306 |
|
|
/* Invalidate recorded information for eh regs if there is an EH
|
6307 |
|
|
edge pointing to that bb. */
|
6308 |
|
|
if (bb_has_eh_pred (bb))
|
6309 |
|
|
{
|
6310 |
|
|
df_ref *def_rec;
|
6311 |
|
|
|
6312 |
|
|
for (def_rec = df_get_artificial_defs (bb->index); *def_rec; def_rec++)
|
6313 |
|
|
{
|
6314 |
|
|
df_ref def = *def_rec;
|
6315 |
|
|
if (DF_REF_FLAGS (def) & DF_REF_AT_TOP)
|
6316 |
|
|
invalidate (DF_REF_REG (def), GET_MODE (DF_REF_REG (def)));
|
6317 |
|
|
}
|
6318 |
|
|
}
|
6319 |
|
|
|
6320 |
|
|
FOR_BB_INSNS (bb, insn)
|
6321 |
|
|
{
|
6322 |
|
|
optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (bb);
|
6323 |
|
|
/* If we have processed 1,000 insns, flush the hash table to
|
6324 |
|
|
avoid extreme quadratic behavior. We must not include NOTEs
|
6325 |
|
|
in the count since there may be more of them when generating
|
6326 |
|
|
debugging information. If we clear the table at different
|
6327 |
|
|
times, code generated with -g -O might be different than code
|
6328 |
|
|
generated with -O but not -g.
|
6329 |
|
|
|
6330 |
|
|
FIXME: This is a real kludge and needs to be done some other
|
6331 |
|
|
way. */
|
6332 |
|
|
if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn)
|
6333 |
|
|
&& num_insns++ > PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_CSE_INSNS))
|
6334 |
|
|
{
|
6335 |
|
|
flush_hash_table ();
|
6336 |
|
|
num_insns = 0;
|
6337 |
|
|
}
|
6338 |
|
|
|
6339 |
|
|
if (INSN_P (insn))
|
6340 |
|
|
{
|
6341 |
|
|
/* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms
|
6342 |
|
|
when looking for duplicate operations. */
|
6343 |
|
|
if (REG_NOTES (insn))
|
6344 |
|
|
{
|
6345 |
|
|
bool changed = false;
|
6346 |
|
|
REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn),
|
6347 |
|
|
NULL_RTX, &changed);
|
6348 |
|
|
if (changed)
|
6349 |
|
|
df_notes_rescan (insn);
|
6350 |
|
|
}
|
6351 |
|
|
|
6352 |
|
|
cse_insn (insn);
|
6353 |
|
|
|
6354 |
|
|
/* If we haven't already found an insn where we added a LABEL_REF,
|
6355 |
|
|
check this one. */
|
6356 |
|
|
if (INSN_P (insn) && !recorded_label_ref
|
6357 |
|
|
&& for_each_rtx (&PATTERN (insn), check_for_label_ref,
|
6358 |
|
|
(void *) insn))
|
6359 |
|
|
recorded_label_ref = true;
|
6360 |
|
|
|
6361 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
6362 |
|
|
/* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer
|
6363 |
|
|
references CC0, delete the previous insn. Here we use
|
6364 |
|
|
fact that nothing expects CC0 to be valid over an insn,
|
6365 |
|
|
which is true until the final pass. */
|
6366 |
|
|
{
|
6367 |
|
|
rtx prev_insn, tem;
|
6368 |
|
|
|
6369 |
|
|
prev_insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
|
6370 |
|
|
if (prev_insn && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev_insn)
|
6371 |
|
|
&& (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
|
6372 |
|
|
&& SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
|
6373 |
|
|
&& ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (insn)))
|
6374 |
|
|
delete_insn (prev_insn);
|
6375 |
|
|
}
|
6376 |
|
|
|
6377 |
|
|
/* If this insn is not the last insn in the basic block,
|
6378 |
|
|
it will be PREV_INSN(insn) in the next iteration. If
|
6379 |
|
|
we recorded any CC0-related information for this insn,
|
6380 |
|
|
remember it. */
|
6381 |
|
|
if (insn != BB_END (bb))
|
6382 |
|
|
{
|
6383 |
|
|
prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
|
6384 |
|
|
prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
|
6385 |
|
|
}
|
6386 |
|
|
#endif
|
6387 |
|
|
}
|
6388 |
|
|
}
|
6389 |
|
|
|
6390 |
|
|
/* With non-call exceptions, we are not always able to update
|
6391 |
|
|
the CFG properly inside cse_insn. So clean up possibly
|
6392 |
|
|
redundant EH edges here. */
|
6393 |
|
|
if (flag_non_call_exceptions && have_eh_succ_edges (bb))
|
6394 |
|
|
cse_cfg_altered |= purge_dead_edges (bb);
|
6395 |
|
|
|
6396 |
|
|
/* If we changed a conditional jump, we may have terminated
|
6397 |
|
|
the path we are following. Check that by verifying that
|
6398 |
|
|
the edge we would take still exists. If the edge does
|
6399 |
|
|
not exist anymore, purge the remainder of the path.
|
6400 |
|
|
Note that this will cause us to return to the caller. */
|
6401 |
|
|
if (path_entry < path_size - 1)
|
6402 |
|
|
{
|
6403 |
|
|
basic_block next_bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry + 1].bb;
|
6404 |
|
|
if (!find_edge (bb, next_bb))
|
6405 |
|
|
{
|
6406 |
|
|
do
|
6407 |
|
|
{
|
6408 |
|
|
path_size--;
|
6409 |
|
|
|
6410 |
|
|
/* If we truncate the path, we must also reset the
|
6411 |
|
|
visited bit on the remaining blocks in the path,
|
6412 |
|
|
or we will never visit them at all. */
|
6413 |
|
|
RESET_BIT (cse_visited_basic_blocks,
|
6414 |
|
|
ebb_data->path[path_size].bb->index);
|
6415 |
|
|
ebb_data->path[path_size].bb = NULL;
|
6416 |
|
|
}
|
6417 |
|
|
while (path_size - 1 != path_entry);
|
6418 |
|
|
ebb_data->path_size = path_size;
|
6419 |
|
|
}
|
6420 |
|
|
}
|
6421 |
|
|
|
6422 |
|
|
/* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known
|
6423 |
|
|
equivalences due to the condition being tested. */
|
6424 |
|
|
insn = BB_END (bb);
|
6425 |
|
|
if (path_entry < path_size - 1
|
6426 |
|
|
&& JUMP_P (insn)
|
6427 |
|
|
&& single_set (insn)
|
6428 |
|
|
&& any_condjump_p (insn))
|
6429 |
|
|
{
|
6430 |
|
|
basic_block next_bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry + 1].bb;
|
6431 |
|
|
bool taken = (next_bb == BRANCH_EDGE (bb)->dest);
|
6432 |
|
|
record_jump_equiv (insn, taken);
|
6433 |
|
|
}
|
6434 |
|
|
|
6435 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
6436 |
|
|
/* Clear the CC0-tracking related insns, they can't provide
|
6437 |
|
|
useful information across basic block boundaries. */
|
6438 |
|
|
prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
|
6439 |
|
|
#endif
|
6440 |
|
|
}
|
6441 |
|
|
|
6442 |
|
|
gcc_assert (next_qty <= max_qty);
|
6443 |
|
|
|
6444 |
|
|
free (qty_table);
|
6445 |
|
|
}
|
6446 |
|
|
|
6447 |
|
|
|
6448 |
|
|
/* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
|
6449 |
|
|
F is the first instruction.
|
6450 |
|
|
NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
|
6451 |
|
|
|
6452 |
|
|
Return 2 if jump optimizations should be redone due to simplifications
|
6453 |
|
|
in conditional jump instructions.
|
6454 |
|
|
Return 1 if the CFG should be cleaned up because it has been modified.
|
6455 |
|
|
Return 0 otherwise. */
|
6456 |
|
|
|
6457 |
|
|
int
|
6458 |
|
|
cse_main (rtx f ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int nregs)
|
6459 |
|
|
{
|
6460 |
|
|
struct cse_basic_block_data ebb_data;
|
6461 |
|
|
basic_block bb;
|
6462 |
|
|
int *rc_order = XNEWVEC (int, last_basic_block);
|
6463 |
|
|
int i, n_blocks;
|
6464 |
|
|
|
6465 |
|
|
df_set_flags (DF_LR_RUN_DCE);
|
6466 |
|
|
df_analyze ();
|
6467 |
|
|
df_set_flags (DF_DEFER_INSN_RESCAN);
|
6468 |
|
|
|
6469 |
|
|
reg_scan (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
|
6470 |
|
|
init_cse_reg_info (nregs);
|
6471 |
|
|
|
6472 |
|
|
ebb_data.path = XNEWVEC (struct branch_path,
|
6473 |
|
|
PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_CSE_PATH_LENGTH));
|
6474 |
|
|
|
6475 |
|
|
cse_cfg_altered = false;
|
6476 |
|
|
cse_jumps_altered = false;
|
6477 |
|
|
recorded_label_ref = false;
|
6478 |
|
|
constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
|
6479 |
|
|
constant_pool_entries_regcost = 0;
|
6480 |
|
|
ebb_data.path_size = 0;
|
6481 |
|
|
ebb_data.nsets = 0;
|
6482 |
|
|
rtl_hooks = cse_rtl_hooks;
|
6483 |
|
|
|
6484 |
|
|
init_recog ();
|
6485 |
|
|
init_alias_analysis ();
|
6486 |
|
|
|
6487 |
|
|
reg_eqv_table = XNEWVEC (struct reg_eqv_elem, nregs);
|
6488 |
|
|
|
6489 |
|
|
/* Set up the table of already visited basic blocks. */
|
6490 |
|
|
cse_visited_basic_blocks = sbitmap_alloc (last_basic_block);
|
6491 |
|
|
sbitmap_zero (cse_visited_basic_blocks);
|
6492 |
|
|
|
6493 |
|
|
/* Loop over basic blocks in reverse completion order (RPO),
|
6494 |
|
|
excluding the ENTRY and EXIT blocks. */
|
6495 |
|
|
n_blocks = pre_and_rev_post_order_compute (NULL, rc_order, false);
|
6496 |
|
|
i = 0;
|
6497 |
|
|
while (i < n_blocks)
|
6498 |
|
|
{
|
6499 |
|
|
/* Find the first block in the RPO queue that we have not yet
|
6500 |
|
|
processed before. */
|
6501 |
|
|
do
|
6502 |
|
|
{
|
6503 |
|
|
bb = BASIC_BLOCK (rc_order[i++]);
|
6504 |
|
|
}
|
6505 |
|
|
while (TEST_BIT (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index)
|
6506 |
|
|
&& i < n_blocks);
|
6507 |
|
|
|
6508 |
|
|
/* Find all paths starting with BB, and process them. */
|
6509 |
|
|
while (cse_find_path (bb, &ebb_data, flag_cse_follow_jumps))
|
6510 |
|
|
{
|
6511 |
|
|
/* Pre-scan the path. */
|
6512 |
|
|
cse_prescan_path (&ebb_data);
|
6513 |
|
|
|
6514 |
|
|
/* If this basic block has no sets, skip it. */
|
6515 |
|
|
if (ebb_data.nsets == 0)
|
6516 |
|
|
continue;
|
6517 |
|
|
|
6518 |
|
|
/* Get a reasonable estimate for the maximum number of qty's
|
6519 |
|
|
needed for this path. For this, we take the number of sets
|
6520 |
|
|
and multiply that by MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS. */
|
6521 |
|
|
max_qty = ebb_data.nsets * MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS;
|
6522 |
|
|
|
6523 |
|
|
/* Dump the path we're about to process. */
|
6524 |
|
|
if (dump_file)
|
6525 |
|
|
cse_dump_path (&ebb_data, ebb_data.nsets, dump_file);
|
6526 |
|
|
|
6527 |
|
|
cse_extended_basic_block (&ebb_data);
|
6528 |
|
|
}
|
6529 |
|
|
}
|
6530 |
|
|
|
6531 |
|
|
/* Clean up. */
|
6532 |
|
|
end_alias_analysis ();
|
6533 |
|
|
free (reg_eqv_table);
|
6534 |
|
|
free (ebb_data.path);
|
6535 |
|
|
sbitmap_free (cse_visited_basic_blocks);
|
6536 |
|
|
free (rc_order);
|
6537 |
|
|
rtl_hooks = general_rtl_hooks;
|
6538 |
|
|
|
6539 |
|
|
if (cse_jumps_altered || recorded_label_ref)
|
6540 |
|
|
return 2;
|
6541 |
|
|
else if (cse_cfg_altered)
|
6542 |
|
|
return 1;
|
6543 |
|
|
else
|
6544 |
|
|
return 0;
|
6545 |
|
|
}
|
6546 |
|
|
|
6547 |
|
|
/* Called via for_each_rtx to see if an insn is using a LABEL_REF for
|
6548 |
|
|
which there isn't a REG_LABEL_OPERAND note.
|
6549 |
|
|
Return one if so. DATA is the insn. */
|
6550 |
|
|
|
6551 |
|
|
static int
|
6552 |
|
|
check_for_label_ref (rtx *rtl, void *data)
|
6553 |
|
|
{
|
6554 |
|
|
rtx insn = (rtx) data;
|
6555 |
|
|
|
6556 |
|
|
/* If this insn uses a LABEL_REF and there isn't a REG_LABEL_OPERAND
|
6557 |
|
|
note for it, we must rerun jump since it needs to place the note. If
|
6558 |
|
|
this is a LABEL_REF for a CODE_LABEL that isn't in the insn chain,
|
6559 |
|
|
don't do this since no REG_LABEL_OPERAND will be added. */
|
6560 |
|
|
return (GET_CODE (*rtl) == LABEL_REF
|
6561 |
|
|
&& ! LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (*rtl)
|
6562 |
|
|
&& (!JUMP_P (insn)
|
6563 |
|
|
|| !label_is_jump_target_p (XEXP (*rtl, 0), insn))
|
6564 |
|
|
&& LABEL_P (XEXP (*rtl, 0))
|
6565 |
|
|
&& INSN_UID (XEXP (*rtl, 0)) != 0
|
6566 |
|
|
&& ! find_reg_note (insn, REG_LABEL_OPERAND, XEXP (*rtl, 0)));
|
6567 |
|
|
}
|
6568 |
|
|
|
6569 |
|
|
/* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
|
6570 |
|
|
COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
|
6571 |
|
|
we count each register usage.
|
6572 |
|
|
|
6573 |
|
|
Don't count a usage of DEST, which is the SET_DEST of a SET which
|
6574 |
|
|
contains X in its SET_SRC. This is because such a SET does not
|
6575 |
|
|
modify the liveness of DEST.
|
6576 |
|
|
DEST is set to pc_rtx for a trapping insn, which means that we must count
|
6577 |
|
|
uses of a SET_DEST regardless because the insn can't be deleted here. */
|
6578 |
|
|
|
6579 |
|
|
static void
|
6580 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (rtx x, int *counts, rtx dest, int incr)
|
6581 |
|
|
{
|
6582 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
6583 |
|
|
rtx note;
|
6584 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
6585 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
6586 |
|
|
|
6587 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
6588 |
|
|
return;
|
6589 |
|
|
|
6590 |
|
|
switch (code = GET_CODE (x))
|
6591 |
|
|
{
|
6592 |
|
|
case REG:
|
6593 |
|
|
if (x != dest)
|
6594 |
|
|
counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
|
6595 |
|
|
return;
|
6596 |
|
|
|
6597 |
|
|
case PC:
|
6598 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
6599 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
6600 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
6601 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
6602 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
6603 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
6604 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
6605 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
6606 |
|
|
return;
|
6607 |
|
|
|
6608 |
|
|
case CLOBBER:
|
6609 |
|
|
/* If we are clobbering a MEM, mark any registers inside the address
|
6610 |
|
|
as being used. */
|
6611 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
|
6612 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
|
6613 |
|
|
return;
|
6614 |
|
|
|
6615 |
|
|
case SET:
|
6616 |
|
|
/* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST. */
|
6617 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (SET_DEST (x)))
|
6618 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
|
6619 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts,
|
6620 |
|
|
dest ? dest : SET_DEST (x),
|
6621 |
|
|
incr);
|
6622 |
|
|
return;
|
6623 |
|
|
|
6624 |
|
|
case DEBUG_INSN:
|
6625 |
|
|
return;
|
6626 |
|
|
|
6627 |
|
|
case CALL_INSN:
|
6628 |
|
|
case INSN:
|
6629 |
|
|
case JUMP_INSN:
|
6630 |
|
|
/* We expect dest to be NULL_RTX here. If the insn may trap, mark
|
6631 |
|
|
this fact by setting DEST to pc_rtx. */
|
6632 |
|
|
if (insn_could_throw_p (x))
|
6633 |
|
|
dest = pc_rtx;
|
6634 |
|
|
if (code == CALL_INSN)
|
6635 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (x), counts, dest, incr);
|
6636 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, dest, incr);
|
6637 |
|
|
|
6638 |
|
|
/* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
|
6639 |
|
|
use them. */
|
6640 |
|
|
|
6641 |
|
|
note = find_reg_equal_equiv_note (x);
|
6642 |
|
|
if (note)
|
6643 |
|
|
{
|
6644 |
|
|
rtx eqv = XEXP (note, 0);
|
6645 |
|
|
|
6646 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (eqv) == EXPR_LIST)
|
6647 |
|
|
/* This REG_EQUAL note describes the result of a function call.
|
6648 |
|
|
Process all the arguments. */
|
6649 |
|
|
do
|
6650 |
|
|
{
|
6651 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (XEXP (eqv, 0), counts, dest, incr);
|
6652 |
|
|
eqv = XEXP (eqv, 1);
|
6653 |
|
|
}
|
6654 |
|
|
while (eqv && GET_CODE (eqv) == EXPR_LIST);
|
6655 |
|
|
else
|
6656 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (eqv, counts, dest, incr);
|
6657 |
|
|
}
|
6658 |
|
|
return;
|
6659 |
|
|
|
6660 |
|
|
case EXPR_LIST:
|
6661 |
|
|
if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL
|
6662 |
|
|
|| (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) != REG_NONNEG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x,0)) == USE)
|
6663 |
|
|
/* FUNCTION_USAGE expression lists may include (CLOBBER (mem /u)),
|
6664 |
|
|
involving registers in the address. */
|
6665 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CLOBBER)
|
6666 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
|
6667 |
|
|
|
6668 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
|
6669 |
|
|
return;
|
6670 |
|
|
|
6671 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
6672 |
|
|
/* If the asm is volatile, then this insn cannot be deleted,
|
6673 |
|
|
and so the inputs *must* be live. */
|
6674 |
|
|
if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
|
6675 |
|
|
dest = NULL_RTX;
|
6676 |
|
|
/* Iterate over just the inputs, not the constraints as well. */
|
6677 |
|
|
for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
6678 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
|
6679 |
|
|
return;
|
6680 |
|
|
|
6681 |
|
|
case INSN_LIST:
|
6682 |
|
|
gcc_unreachable ();
|
6683 |
|
|
|
6684 |
|
|
default:
|
6685 |
|
|
break;
|
6686 |
|
|
}
|
6687 |
|
|
|
6688 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
6689 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
6690 |
|
|
{
|
6691 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
6692 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
|
6693 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
6694 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
|
6695 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, dest, incr);
|
6696 |
|
|
}
|
6697 |
|
|
}
|
6698 |
|
|
|
6699 |
|
|
/* Return true if a register is dead. Can be used in for_each_rtx. */
|
6700 |
|
|
|
6701 |
|
|
static int
|
6702 |
|
|
is_dead_reg (rtx *loc, void *data)
|
6703 |
|
|
{
|
6704 |
|
|
rtx x = *loc;
|
6705 |
|
|
int *counts = (int *)data;
|
6706 |
|
|
|
6707 |
|
|
return (REG_P (x)
|
6708 |
|
|
&& REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
6709 |
|
|
&& counts[REGNO (x)] == 0);
|
6710 |
|
|
}
|
6711 |
|
|
|
6712 |
|
|
/* Return true if set is live. */
|
6713 |
|
|
static bool
|
6714 |
|
|
set_live_p (rtx set, rtx insn ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, /* Only used with HAVE_cc0. */
|
6715 |
|
|
int *counts)
|
6716 |
|
|
{
|
6717 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
6718 |
|
|
rtx tem;
|
6719 |
|
|
#endif
|
6720 |
|
|
|
6721 |
|
|
if (set_noop_p (set))
|
6722 |
|
|
;
|
6723 |
|
|
|
6724 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
6725 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == CC0
|
6726 |
|
|
&& !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set))
|
6727 |
|
|
&& ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
|
6728 |
|
|
|| !INSN_P (tem)
|
6729 |
|
|
|| !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
|
6730 |
|
|
return false;
|
6731 |
|
|
#endif
|
6732 |
|
|
else if (!is_dead_reg (&SET_DEST (set), counts)
|
6733 |
|
|
|| side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set)))
|
6734 |
|
|
return true;
|
6735 |
|
|
return false;
|
6736 |
|
|
}
|
6737 |
|
|
|
6738 |
|
|
/* Return true if insn is live. */
|
6739 |
|
|
|
6740 |
|
|
static bool
|
6741 |
|
|
insn_live_p (rtx insn, int *counts)
|
6742 |
|
|
{
|
6743 |
|
|
int i;
|
6744 |
|
|
if (insn_could_throw_p (insn))
|
6745 |
|
|
return true;
|
6746 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
|
6747 |
|
|
return set_live_p (PATTERN (insn), insn, counts);
|
6748 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
|
6749 |
|
|
{
|
6750 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
6751 |
|
|
{
|
6752 |
|
|
rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
|
6753 |
|
|
|
6754 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
|
6755 |
|
|
{
|
6756 |
|
|
if (set_live_p (elt, insn, counts))
|
6757 |
|
|
return true;
|
6758 |
|
|
}
|
6759 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
|
6760 |
|
|
return true;
|
6761 |
|
|
}
|
6762 |
|
|
return false;
|
6763 |
|
|
}
|
6764 |
|
|
else if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
|
6765 |
|
|
{
|
6766 |
|
|
rtx next;
|
6767 |
|
|
|
6768 |
|
|
for (next = NEXT_INSN (insn); next; next = NEXT_INSN (next))
|
6769 |
|
|
if (NOTE_P (next))
|
6770 |
|
|
continue;
|
6771 |
|
|
else if (!DEBUG_INSN_P (next))
|
6772 |
|
|
return true;
|
6773 |
|
|
else if (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_DECL (insn) == INSN_VAR_LOCATION_DECL (next))
|
6774 |
|
|
return false;
|
6775 |
|
|
|
6776 |
|
|
/* If this debug insn references a dead register, drop the
|
6777 |
|
|
location expression for now. ??? We could try to find the
|
6778 |
|
|
def and see if propagation is possible. */
|
6779 |
|
|
if (for_each_rtx (&INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn), is_dead_reg, counts))
|
6780 |
|
|
{
|
6781 |
|
|
INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn) = gen_rtx_UNKNOWN_VAR_LOC ();
|
6782 |
|
|
df_insn_rescan (insn);
|
6783 |
|
|
}
|
6784 |
|
|
|
6785 |
|
|
return true;
|
6786 |
|
|
}
|
6787 |
|
|
else
|
6788 |
|
|
return true;
|
6789 |
|
|
}
|
6790 |
|
|
|
6791 |
|
|
/* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
|
6792 |
|
|
that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
|
6793 |
|
|
|
6794 |
|
|
This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse, loop or other
|
6795 |
|
|
optimizations. It improves the heuristics in loop since it won't try to
|
6796 |
|
|
move dead invariants out of loops or make givs for dead quantities. The
|
6797 |
|
|
remaining passes of the compilation are also sped up. */
|
6798 |
|
|
|
6799 |
|
|
int
|
6800 |
|
|
delete_trivially_dead_insns (rtx insns, int nreg)
|
6801 |
|
|
{
|
6802 |
|
|
int *counts;
|
6803 |
|
|
rtx insn, prev;
|
6804 |
|
|
int ndead = 0;
|
6805 |
|
|
|
6806 |
|
|
timevar_push (TV_DELETE_TRIVIALLY_DEAD);
|
6807 |
|
|
/* First count the number of times each register is used. */
|
6808 |
|
|
counts = XCNEWVEC (int, nreg);
|
6809 |
|
|
for (insn = insns; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
|
6810 |
|
|
if (INSN_P (insn))
|
6811 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, 1);
|
6812 |
|
|
|
6813 |
|
|
/* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
|
6814 |
|
|
registers or copy a register to itself. As we delete an insn, remove
|
6815 |
|
|
usage counts for registers it uses.
|
6816 |
|
|
|
6817 |
|
|
The first jump optimization pass may leave a real insn as the last
|
6818 |
|
|
insn in the function. We must not skip that insn or we may end
|
6819 |
|
|
up deleting code that is not really dead. */
|
6820 |
|
|
for (insn = get_last_insn (); insn; insn = prev)
|
6821 |
|
|
{
|
6822 |
|
|
int live_insn = 0;
|
6823 |
|
|
|
6824 |
|
|
prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
|
6825 |
|
|
if (!INSN_P (insn))
|
6826 |
|
|
continue;
|
6827 |
|
|
|
6828 |
|
|
live_insn = insn_live_p (insn, counts);
|
6829 |
|
|
|
6830 |
|
|
/* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
|
6831 |
|
|
being used. */
|
6832 |
|
|
|
6833 |
|
|
if (! live_insn && dbg_cnt (delete_trivial_dead))
|
6834 |
|
|
{
|
6835 |
|
|
count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, -1);
|
6836 |
|
|
delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
|
6837 |
|
|
ndead++;
|
6838 |
|
|
}
|
6839 |
|
|
}
|
6840 |
|
|
|
6841 |
|
|
if (dump_file && ndead)
|
6842 |
|
|
fprintf (dump_file, "Deleted %i trivially dead insns\n",
|
6843 |
|
|
ndead);
|
6844 |
|
|
/* Clean up. */
|
6845 |
|
|
free (counts);
|
6846 |
|
|
timevar_pop (TV_DELETE_TRIVIALLY_DEAD);
|
6847 |
|
|
return ndead;
|
6848 |
|
|
}
|
6849 |
|
|
|
6850 |
|
|
/* This function is called via for_each_rtx. The argument, NEWREG, is
|
6851 |
|
|
a condition code register with the desired mode. If we are looking
|
6852 |
|
|
at the same register in a different mode, replace it with
|
6853 |
|
|
NEWREG. */
|
6854 |
|
|
|
6855 |
|
|
static int
|
6856 |
|
|
cse_change_cc_mode (rtx *loc, void *data)
|
6857 |
|
|
{
|
6858 |
|
|
struct change_cc_mode_args* args = (struct change_cc_mode_args*)data;
|
6859 |
|
|
|
6860 |
|
|
if (*loc
|
6861 |
|
|
&& REG_P (*loc)
|
6862 |
|
|
&& REGNO (*loc) == REGNO (args->newreg)
|
6863 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE (*loc) != GET_MODE (args->newreg))
|
6864 |
|
|
{
|
6865 |
|
|
validate_change (args->insn, loc, args->newreg, 1);
|
6866 |
|
|
|
6867 |
|
|
return -1;
|
6868 |
|
|
}
|
6869 |
|
|
return 0;
|
6870 |
|
|
}
|
6871 |
|
|
|
6872 |
|
|
/* Change the mode of any reference to the register REGNO (NEWREG) to
|
6873 |
|
|
GET_MODE (NEWREG) in INSN. */
|
6874 |
|
|
|
6875 |
|
|
static void
|
6876 |
|
|
cse_change_cc_mode_insn (rtx insn, rtx newreg)
|
6877 |
|
|
{
|
6878 |
|
|
struct change_cc_mode_args args;
|
6879 |
|
|
int success;
|
6880 |
|
|
|
6881 |
|
|
if (!INSN_P (insn))
|
6882 |
|
|
return;
|
6883 |
|
|
|
6884 |
|
|
args.insn = insn;
|
6885 |
|
|
args.newreg = newreg;
|
6886 |
|
|
|
6887 |
|
|
for_each_rtx (&PATTERN (insn), cse_change_cc_mode, &args);
|
6888 |
|
|
for_each_rtx (®_NOTES (insn), cse_change_cc_mode, &args);
|
6889 |
|
|
|
6890 |
|
|
/* If the following assertion was triggered, there is most probably
|
6891 |
|
|
something wrong with the cc_modes_compatible back end function.
|
6892 |
|
|
CC modes only can be considered compatible if the insn - with the mode
|
6893 |
|
|
replaced by any of the compatible modes - can still be recognized. */
|
6894 |
|
|
success = apply_change_group ();
|
6895 |
|
|
gcc_assert (success);
|
6896 |
|
|
}
|
6897 |
|
|
|
6898 |
|
|
/* Change the mode of any reference to the register REGNO (NEWREG) to
|
6899 |
|
|
GET_MODE (NEWREG), starting at START. Stop before END. Stop at
|
6900 |
|
|
any instruction which modifies NEWREG. */
|
6901 |
|
|
|
6902 |
|
|
static void
|
6903 |
|
|
cse_change_cc_mode_insns (rtx start, rtx end, rtx newreg)
|
6904 |
|
|
{
|
6905 |
|
|
rtx insn;
|
6906 |
|
|
|
6907 |
|
|
for (insn = start; insn != end; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
|
6908 |
|
|
{
|
6909 |
|
|
if (! INSN_P (insn))
|
6910 |
|
|
continue;
|
6911 |
|
|
|
6912 |
|
|
if (reg_set_p (newreg, insn))
|
6913 |
|
|
return;
|
6914 |
|
|
|
6915 |
|
|
cse_change_cc_mode_insn (insn, newreg);
|
6916 |
|
|
}
|
6917 |
|
|
}
|
6918 |
|
|
|
6919 |
|
|
/* BB is a basic block which finishes with CC_REG as a condition code
|
6920 |
|
|
register which is set to CC_SRC. Look through the successors of BB
|
6921 |
|
|
to find blocks which have a single predecessor (i.e., this one),
|
6922 |
|
|
and look through those blocks for an assignment to CC_REG which is
|
6923 |
|
|
equivalent to CC_SRC. CAN_CHANGE_MODE indicates whether we are
|
6924 |
|
|
permitted to change the mode of CC_SRC to a compatible mode. This
|
6925 |
|
|
returns VOIDmode if no equivalent assignments were found.
|
6926 |
|
|
Otherwise it returns the mode which CC_SRC should wind up with.
|
6927 |
|
|
ORIG_BB should be the same as BB in the outermost cse_cc_succs call,
|
6928 |
|
|
but is passed unmodified down to recursive calls in order to prevent
|
6929 |
|
|
endless recursion.
|
6930 |
|
|
|
6931 |
|
|
The main complexity in this function is handling the mode issues.
|
6932 |
|
|
We may have more than one duplicate which we can eliminate, and we
|
6933 |
|
|
try to find a mode which will work for multiple duplicates. */
|
6934 |
|
|
|
6935 |
|
|
static enum machine_mode
|
6936 |
|
|
cse_cc_succs (basic_block bb, basic_block orig_bb, rtx cc_reg, rtx cc_src,
|
6937 |
|
|
bool can_change_mode)
|
6938 |
|
|
{
|
6939 |
|
|
bool found_equiv;
|
6940 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode;
|
6941 |
|
|
unsigned int insn_count;
|
6942 |
|
|
edge e;
|
6943 |
|
|
rtx insns[2];
|
6944 |
|
|
enum machine_mode modes[2];
|
6945 |
|
|
rtx last_insns[2];
|
6946 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
6947 |
|
|
rtx newreg;
|
6948 |
|
|
edge_iterator ei;
|
6949 |
|
|
|
6950 |
|
|
/* We expect to have two successors. Look at both before picking
|
6951 |
|
|
the final mode for the comparison. If we have more successors
|
6952 |
|
|
(i.e., some sort of table jump, although that seems unlikely),
|
6953 |
|
|
then we require all beyond the first two to use the same
|
6954 |
|
|
mode. */
|
6955 |
|
|
|
6956 |
|
|
found_equiv = false;
|
6957 |
|
|
mode = GET_MODE (cc_src);
|
6958 |
|
|
insn_count = 0;
|
6959 |
|
|
FOR_EACH_EDGE (e, ei, bb->succs)
|
6960 |
|
|
{
|
6961 |
|
|
rtx insn;
|
6962 |
|
|
rtx end;
|
6963 |
|
|
|
6964 |
|
|
if (e->flags & EDGE_COMPLEX)
|
6965 |
|
|
continue;
|
6966 |
|
|
|
6967 |
|
|
if (EDGE_COUNT (e->dest->preds) != 1
|
6968 |
|
|
|| e->dest == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR
|
6969 |
|
|
/* Avoid endless recursion on unreachable blocks. */
|
6970 |
|
|
|| e->dest == orig_bb)
|
6971 |
|
|
continue;
|
6972 |
|
|
|
6973 |
|
|
end = NEXT_INSN (BB_END (e->dest));
|
6974 |
|
|
for (insn = BB_HEAD (e->dest); insn != end; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
|
6975 |
|
|
{
|
6976 |
|
|
rtx set;
|
6977 |
|
|
|
6978 |
|
|
if (! INSN_P (insn))
|
6979 |
|
|
continue;
|
6980 |
|
|
|
6981 |
|
|
/* If CC_SRC is modified, we have to stop looking for
|
6982 |
|
|
something which uses it. */
|
6983 |
|
|
if (modified_in_p (cc_src, insn))
|
6984 |
|
|
break;
|
6985 |
|
|
|
6986 |
|
|
/* Check whether INSN sets CC_REG to CC_SRC. */
|
6987 |
|
|
set = single_set (insn);
|
6988 |
|
|
if (set
|
6989 |
|
|
&& REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
|
6990 |
|
|
&& REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) == REGNO (cc_reg))
|
6991 |
|
|
{
|
6992 |
|
|
bool found;
|
6993 |
|
|
enum machine_mode set_mode;
|
6994 |
|
|
enum machine_mode comp_mode;
|
6995 |
|
|
|
6996 |
|
|
found = false;
|
6997 |
|
|
set_mode = GET_MODE (SET_SRC (set));
|
6998 |
|
|
comp_mode = set_mode;
|
6999 |
|
|
if (rtx_equal_p (cc_src, SET_SRC (set)))
|
7000 |
|
|
found = true;
|
7001 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (cc_src) == COMPARE
|
7002 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == COMPARE
|
7003 |
|
|
&& mode != set_mode
|
7004 |
|
|
&& rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cc_src, 0),
|
7005 |
|
|
XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0))
|
7006 |
|
|
&& rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cc_src, 1),
|
7007 |
|
|
XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 1)))
|
7008 |
|
|
|
7009 |
|
|
{
|
7010 |
|
|
comp_mode = targetm.cc_modes_compatible (mode, set_mode);
|
7011 |
|
|
if (comp_mode != VOIDmode
|
7012 |
|
|
&& (can_change_mode || comp_mode == mode))
|
7013 |
|
|
found = true;
|
7014 |
|
|
}
|
7015 |
|
|
|
7016 |
|
|
if (found)
|
7017 |
|
|
{
|
7018 |
|
|
found_equiv = true;
|
7019 |
|
|
if (insn_count < ARRAY_SIZE (insns))
|
7020 |
|
|
{
|
7021 |
|
|
insns[insn_count] = insn;
|
7022 |
|
|
modes[insn_count] = set_mode;
|
7023 |
|
|
last_insns[insn_count] = end;
|
7024 |
|
|
++insn_count;
|
7025 |
|
|
|
7026 |
|
|
if (mode != comp_mode)
|
7027 |
|
|
{
|
7028 |
|
|
gcc_assert (can_change_mode);
|
7029 |
|
|
mode = comp_mode;
|
7030 |
|
|
|
7031 |
|
|
/* The modified insn will be re-recognized later. */
|
7032 |
|
|
PUT_MODE (cc_src, mode);
|
7033 |
|
|
}
|
7034 |
|
|
}
|
7035 |
|
|
else
|
7036 |
|
|
{
|
7037 |
|
|
if (set_mode != mode)
|
7038 |
|
|
{
|
7039 |
|
|
/* We found a matching expression in the
|
7040 |
|
|
wrong mode, but we don't have room to
|
7041 |
|
|
store it in the array. Punt. This case
|
7042 |
|
|
should be rare. */
|
7043 |
|
|
break;
|
7044 |
|
|
}
|
7045 |
|
|
/* INSN sets CC_REG to a value equal to CC_SRC
|
7046 |
|
|
with the right mode. We can simply delete
|
7047 |
|
|
it. */
|
7048 |
|
|
delete_insn (insn);
|
7049 |
|
|
}
|
7050 |
|
|
|
7051 |
|
|
/* We found an instruction to delete. Keep looking,
|
7052 |
|
|
in the hopes of finding a three-way jump. */
|
7053 |
|
|
continue;
|
7054 |
|
|
}
|
7055 |
|
|
|
7056 |
|
|
/* We found an instruction which sets the condition
|
7057 |
|
|
code, so don't look any farther. */
|
7058 |
|
|
break;
|
7059 |
|
|
}
|
7060 |
|
|
|
7061 |
|
|
/* If INSN sets CC_REG in some other way, don't look any
|
7062 |
|
|
farther. */
|
7063 |
|
|
if (reg_set_p (cc_reg, insn))
|
7064 |
|
|
break;
|
7065 |
|
|
}
|
7066 |
|
|
|
7067 |
|
|
/* If we fell off the bottom of the block, we can keep looking
|
7068 |
|
|
through successors. We pass CAN_CHANGE_MODE as false because
|
7069 |
|
|
we aren't prepared to handle compatibility between the
|
7070 |
|
|
further blocks and this block. */
|
7071 |
|
|
if (insn == end)
|
7072 |
|
|
{
|
7073 |
|
|
enum machine_mode submode;
|
7074 |
|
|
|
7075 |
|
|
submode = cse_cc_succs (e->dest, orig_bb, cc_reg, cc_src, false);
|
7076 |
|
|
if (submode != VOIDmode)
|
7077 |
|
|
{
|
7078 |
|
|
gcc_assert (submode == mode);
|
7079 |
|
|
found_equiv = true;
|
7080 |
|
|
can_change_mode = false;
|
7081 |
|
|
}
|
7082 |
|
|
}
|
7083 |
|
|
}
|
7084 |
|
|
|
7085 |
|
|
if (! found_equiv)
|
7086 |
|
|
return VOIDmode;
|
7087 |
|
|
|
7088 |
|
|
/* Now INSN_COUNT is the number of instructions we found which set
|
7089 |
|
|
CC_REG to a value equivalent to CC_SRC. The instructions are in
|
7090 |
|
|
INSNS. The modes used by those instructions are in MODES. */
|
7091 |
|
|
|
7092 |
|
|
newreg = NULL_RTX;
|
7093 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < insn_count; ++i)
|
7094 |
|
|
{
|
7095 |
|
|
if (modes[i] != mode)
|
7096 |
|
|
{
|
7097 |
|
|
/* We need to change the mode of CC_REG in INSNS[i] and
|
7098 |
|
|
subsequent instructions. */
|
7099 |
|
|
if (! newreg)
|
7100 |
|
|
{
|
7101 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (cc_reg) == mode)
|
7102 |
|
|
newreg = cc_reg;
|
7103 |
|
|
else
|
7104 |
|
|
newreg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, REGNO (cc_reg));
|
7105 |
|
|
}
|
7106 |
|
|
cse_change_cc_mode_insns (NEXT_INSN (insns[i]), last_insns[i],
|
7107 |
|
|
newreg);
|
7108 |
|
|
}
|
7109 |
|
|
|
7110 |
|
|
delete_insn_and_edges (insns[i]);
|
7111 |
|
|
}
|
7112 |
|
|
|
7113 |
|
|
return mode;
|
7114 |
|
|
}
|
7115 |
|
|
|
7116 |
|
|
/* If we have a fixed condition code register (or two), walk through
|
7117 |
|
|
the instructions and try to eliminate duplicate assignments. */
|
7118 |
|
|
|
7119 |
|
|
static void
|
7120 |
|
|
cse_condition_code_reg (void)
|
7121 |
|
|
{
|
7122 |
|
|
unsigned int cc_regno_1;
|
7123 |
|
|
unsigned int cc_regno_2;
|
7124 |
|
|
rtx cc_reg_1;
|
7125 |
|
|
rtx cc_reg_2;
|
7126 |
|
|
basic_block bb;
|
7127 |
|
|
|
7128 |
|
|
if (! targetm.fixed_condition_code_regs (&cc_regno_1, &cc_regno_2))
|
7129 |
|
|
return;
|
7130 |
|
|
|
7131 |
|
|
cc_reg_1 = gen_rtx_REG (CCmode, cc_regno_1);
|
7132 |
|
|
if (cc_regno_2 != INVALID_REGNUM)
|
7133 |
|
|
cc_reg_2 = gen_rtx_REG (CCmode, cc_regno_2);
|
7134 |
|
|
else
|
7135 |
|
|
cc_reg_2 = NULL_RTX;
|
7136 |
|
|
|
7137 |
|
|
FOR_EACH_BB (bb)
|
7138 |
|
|
{
|
7139 |
|
|
rtx last_insn;
|
7140 |
|
|
rtx cc_reg;
|
7141 |
|
|
rtx insn;
|
7142 |
|
|
rtx cc_src_insn;
|
7143 |
|
|
rtx cc_src;
|
7144 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode;
|
7145 |
|
|
enum machine_mode orig_mode;
|
7146 |
|
|
|
7147 |
|
|
/* Look for blocks which end with a conditional jump based on a
|
7148 |
|
|
condition code register. Then look for the instruction which
|
7149 |
|
|
sets the condition code register. Then look through the
|
7150 |
|
|
successor blocks for instructions which set the condition
|
7151 |
|
|
code register to the same value. There are other possible
|
7152 |
|
|
uses of the condition code register, but these are by far the
|
7153 |
|
|
most common and the ones which we are most likely to be able
|
7154 |
|
|
to optimize. */
|
7155 |
|
|
|
7156 |
|
|
last_insn = BB_END (bb);
|
7157 |
|
|
if (!JUMP_P (last_insn))
|
7158 |
|
|
continue;
|
7159 |
|
|
|
7160 |
|
|
if (reg_referenced_p (cc_reg_1, PATTERN (last_insn)))
|
7161 |
|
|
cc_reg = cc_reg_1;
|
7162 |
|
|
else if (cc_reg_2 && reg_referenced_p (cc_reg_2, PATTERN (last_insn)))
|
7163 |
|
|
cc_reg = cc_reg_2;
|
7164 |
|
|
else
|
7165 |
|
|
continue;
|
7166 |
|
|
|
7167 |
|
|
cc_src_insn = NULL_RTX;
|
7168 |
|
|
cc_src = NULL_RTX;
|
7169 |
|
|
for (insn = PREV_INSN (last_insn);
|
7170 |
|
|
insn && insn != PREV_INSN (BB_HEAD (bb));
|
7171 |
|
|
insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
|
7172 |
|
|
{
|
7173 |
|
|
rtx set;
|
7174 |
|
|
|
7175 |
|
|
if (! INSN_P (insn))
|
7176 |
|
|
continue;
|
7177 |
|
|
set = single_set (insn);
|
7178 |
|
|
if (set
|
7179 |
|
|
&& REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
|
7180 |
|
|
&& REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) == REGNO (cc_reg))
|
7181 |
|
|
{
|
7182 |
|
|
cc_src_insn = insn;
|
7183 |
|
|
cc_src = SET_SRC (set);
|
7184 |
|
|
break;
|
7185 |
|
|
}
|
7186 |
|
|
else if (reg_set_p (cc_reg, insn))
|
7187 |
|
|
break;
|
7188 |
|
|
}
|
7189 |
|
|
|
7190 |
|
|
if (! cc_src_insn)
|
7191 |
|
|
continue;
|
7192 |
|
|
|
7193 |
|
|
if (modified_between_p (cc_src, cc_src_insn, NEXT_INSN (last_insn)))
|
7194 |
|
|
continue;
|
7195 |
|
|
|
7196 |
|
|
/* Now CC_REG is a condition code register used for a
|
7197 |
|
|
conditional jump at the end of the block, and CC_SRC, in
|
7198 |
|
|
CC_SRC_INSN, is the value to which that condition code
|
7199 |
|
|
register is set, and CC_SRC is still meaningful at the end of
|
7200 |
|
|
the basic block. */
|
7201 |
|
|
|
7202 |
|
|
orig_mode = GET_MODE (cc_src);
|
7203 |
|
|
mode = cse_cc_succs (bb, bb, cc_reg, cc_src, true);
|
7204 |
|
|
if (mode != VOIDmode)
|
7205 |
|
|
{
|
7206 |
|
|
gcc_assert (mode == GET_MODE (cc_src));
|
7207 |
|
|
if (mode != orig_mode)
|
7208 |
|
|
{
|
7209 |
|
|
rtx newreg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, REGNO (cc_reg));
|
7210 |
|
|
|
7211 |
|
|
cse_change_cc_mode_insn (cc_src_insn, newreg);
|
7212 |
|
|
|
7213 |
|
|
/* Do the same in the following insns that use the
|
7214 |
|
|
current value of CC_REG within BB. */
|
7215 |
|
|
cse_change_cc_mode_insns (NEXT_INSN (cc_src_insn),
|
7216 |
|
|
NEXT_INSN (last_insn),
|
7217 |
|
|
newreg);
|
7218 |
|
|
}
|
7219 |
|
|
}
|
7220 |
|
|
}
|
7221 |
|
|
}
|
7222 |
|
|
|
7223 |
|
|
|
7224 |
|
|
/* Perform common subexpression elimination. Nonzero value from
|
7225 |
|
|
`cse_main' means that jumps were simplified and some code may now
|
7226 |
|
|
be unreachable, so do jump optimization again. */
|
7227 |
|
|
static bool
|
7228 |
|
|
gate_handle_cse (void)
|
7229 |
|
|
{
|
7230 |
|
|
return optimize > 0;
|
7231 |
|
|
}
|
7232 |
|
|
|
7233 |
|
|
static unsigned int
|
7234 |
|
|
rest_of_handle_cse (void)
|
7235 |
|
|
{
|
7236 |
|
|
int tem;
|
7237 |
|
|
|
7238 |
|
|
if (dump_file)
|
7239 |
|
|
dump_flow_info (dump_file, dump_flags);
|
7240 |
|
|
|
7241 |
|
|
tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
|
7242 |
|
|
|
7243 |
|
|
/* If we are not running more CSE passes, then we are no longer
|
7244 |
|
|
expecting CSE to be run. But always rerun it in a cheap mode. */
|
7245 |
|
|
cse_not_expected = !flag_rerun_cse_after_loop && !flag_gcse;
|
7246 |
|
|
|
7247 |
|
|
if (tem == 2)
|
7248 |
|
|
{
|
7249 |
|
|
timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
|
7250 |
|
|
rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
|
7251 |
|
|
cleanup_cfg (0);
|
7252 |
|
|
timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
|
7253 |
|
|
}
|
7254 |
|
|
else if (tem == 1 || optimize > 1)
|
7255 |
|
|
cleanup_cfg (0);
|
7256 |
|
|
|
7257 |
|
|
return 0;
|
7258 |
|
|
}
|
7259 |
|
|
|
7260 |
|
|
struct rtl_opt_pass pass_cse =
|
7261 |
|
|
{
|
7262 |
|
|
{
|
7263 |
|
|
RTL_PASS,
|
7264 |
|
|
"cse1", /* name */
|
7265 |
|
|
gate_handle_cse, /* gate */
|
7266 |
|
|
rest_of_handle_cse, /* execute */
|
7267 |
|
|
NULL, /* sub */
|
7268 |
|
|
NULL, /* next */
|
7269 |
|
|
0, /* static_pass_number */
|
7270 |
|
|
TV_CSE, /* tv_id */
|
7271 |
|
|
0, /* properties_required */
|
7272 |
|
|
0, /* properties_provided */
|
7273 |
|
|
0, /* properties_destroyed */
|
7274 |
|
|
0, /* todo_flags_start */
|
7275 |
|
|
TODO_df_finish | TODO_verify_rtl_sharing |
|
7276 |
|
|
TODO_dump_func |
|
7277 |
|
|
TODO_ggc_collect |
|
7278 |
|
|
TODO_verify_flow, /* todo_flags_finish */
|
7279 |
|
|
}
|
7280 |
|
|
};
|
7281 |
|
|
|
7282 |
|
|
|
7283 |
|
|
static bool
|
7284 |
|
|
gate_handle_cse2 (void)
|
7285 |
|
|
{
|
7286 |
|
|
return optimize > 0 && flag_rerun_cse_after_loop;
|
7287 |
|
|
}
|
7288 |
|
|
|
7289 |
|
|
/* Run second CSE pass after loop optimizations. */
|
7290 |
|
|
static unsigned int
|
7291 |
|
|
rest_of_handle_cse2 (void)
|
7292 |
|
|
{
|
7293 |
|
|
int tem;
|
7294 |
|
|
|
7295 |
|
|
if (dump_file)
|
7296 |
|
|
dump_flow_info (dump_file, dump_flags);
|
7297 |
|
|
|
7298 |
|
|
tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
|
7299 |
|
|
|
7300 |
|
|
/* Run a pass to eliminate duplicated assignments to condition code
|
7301 |
|
|
registers. We have to run this after bypass_jumps, because it
|
7302 |
|
|
makes it harder for that pass to determine whether a jump can be
|
7303 |
|
|
bypassed safely. */
|
7304 |
|
|
cse_condition_code_reg ();
|
7305 |
|
|
|
7306 |
|
|
delete_trivially_dead_insns (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
|
7307 |
|
|
|
7308 |
|
|
if (tem == 2)
|
7309 |
|
|
{
|
7310 |
|
|
timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
|
7311 |
|
|
rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
|
7312 |
|
|
cleanup_cfg (0);
|
7313 |
|
|
timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
|
7314 |
|
|
}
|
7315 |
|
|
else if (tem == 1)
|
7316 |
|
|
cleanup_cfg (0);
|
7317 |
|
|
|
7318 |
|
|
cse_not_expected = 1;
|
7319 |
|
|
return 0;
|
7320 |
|
|
}
|
7321 |
|
|
|
7322 |
|
|
|
7323 |
|
|
struct rtl_opt_pass pass_cse2 =
|
7324 |
|
|
{
|
7325 |
|
|
{
|
7326 |
|
|
RTL_PASS,
|
7327 |
|
|
"cse2", /* name */
|
7328 |
|
|
gate_handle_cse2, /* gate */
|
7329 |
|
|
rest_of_handle_cse2, /* execute */
|
7330 |
|
|
NULL, /* sub */
|
7331 |
|
|
NULL, /* next */
|
7332 |
|
|
0, /* static_pass_number */
|
7333 |
|
|
TV_CSE2, /* tv_id */
|
7334 |
|
|
0, /* properties_required */
|
7335 |
|
|
0, /* properties_provided */
|
7336 |
|
|
0, /* properties_destroyed */
|
7337 |
|
|
0, /* todo_flags_start */
|
7338 |
|
|
TODO_df_finish | TODO_verify_rtl_sharing |
|
7339 |
|
|
TODO_dump_func |
|
7340 |
|
|
TODO_ggc_collect |
|
7341 |
|
|
TODO_verify_flow /* todo_flags_finish */
|
7342 |
|
|
}
|
7343 |
|
|
};
|
7344 |
|
|
|
7345 |
|
|
static bool
|
7346 |
|
|
gate_handle_cse_after_global_opts (void)
|
7347 |
|
|
{
|
7348 |
|
|
return optimize > 0 && flag_rerun_cse_after_global_opts;
|
7349 |
|
|
}
|
7350 |
|
|
|
7351 |
|
|
/* Run second CSE pass after loop optimizations. */
|
7352 |
|
|
static unsigned int
|
7353 |
|
|
rest_of_handle_cse_after_global_opts (void)
|
7354 |
|
|
{
|
7355 |
|
|
int save_cfj;
|
7356 |
|
|
int tem;
|
7357 |
|
|
|
7358 |
|
|
/* We only want to do local CSE, so don't follow jumps. */
|
7359 |
|
|
save_cfj = flag_cse_follow_jumps;
|
7360 |
|
|
flag_cse_follow_jumps = 0;
|
7361 |
|
|
|
7362 |
|
|
rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
|
7363 |
|
|
tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
|
7364 |
|
|
purge_all_dead_edges ();
|
7365 |
|
|
delete_trivially_dead_insns (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
|
7366 |
|
|
|
7367 |
|
|
cse_not_expected = !flag_rerun_cse_after_loop;
|
7368 |
|
|
|
7369 |
|
|
/* If cse altered any jumps, rerun jump opts to clean things up. */
|
7370 |
|
|
if (tem == 2)
|
7371 |
|
|
{
|
7372 |
|
|
timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
|
7373 |
|
|
rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
|
7374 |
|
|
cleanup_cfg (0);
|
7375 |
|
|
timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
|
7376 |
|
|
}
|
7377 |
|
|
else if (tem == 1)
|
7378 |
|
|
cleanup_cfg (0);
|
7379 |
|
|
|
7380 |
|
|
flag_cse_follow_jumps = save_cfj;
|
7381 |
|
|
return 0;
|
7382 |
|
|
}
|
7383 |
|
|
|
7384 |
|
|
struct rtl_opt_pass pass_cse_after_global_opts =
|
7385 |
|
|
{
|
7386 |
|
|
{
|
7387 |
|
|
RTL_PASS,
|
7388 |
|
|
"cse_local", /* name */
|
7389 |
|
|
gate_handle_cse_after_global_opts, /* gate */
|
7390 |
|
|
rest_of_handle_cse_after_global_opts, /* execute */
|
7391 |
|
|
NULL, /* sub */
|
7392 |
|
|
NULL, /* next */
|
7393 |
|
|
0, /* static_pass_number */
|
7394 |
|
|
TV_CSE, /* tv_id */
|
7395 |
|
|
0, /* properties_required */
|
7396 |
|
|
0, /* properties_provided */
|
7397 |
|
|
0, /* properties_destroyed */
|
7398 |
|
|
0, /* todo_flags_start */
|
7399 |
|
|
TODO_df_finish | TODO_verify_rtl_sharing |
|
7400 |
|
|
TODO_dump_func |
|
7401 |
|
|
TODO_ggc_collect |
|
7402 |
|
|
TODO_verify_flow /* todo_flags_finish */
|
7403 |
|
|
}
|
7404 |
|
|
};
|